Abb acs310-users-guide

ACS310
User’s Manual
ACS310 Drives
Clearwater Tech - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.clrwtr.com - Email: info@clrwtr.com

List of related manuals
DRIVE MANUALS Code (EN)
ACS310 Short User’s Manual 3AUA0000044200 2)
ACS310 User’s Manual 3AUA0000044201
OPTION MANUALS Code (EN)
MFDT-01 FlashDrop User’s Manual 3AFE68591074 2)
MREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module User's Manual for ACS310/
ACS350
3AUA0000035974 2)
MUL1-R1 Installation Instructions for ACS150, ACS310 and ACS350 3AFE68642868 1, 2)
MUL1-R3 Installation Instructions for ACS150, ACS310 and ACS350 3AFE68643147 1, 2)
MUL1-R4 Installation Instructions for ACS310 and ACS350 3AUA0000025916 1, 2)
SREA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module Quick Start-up Guide 3AUA0000042902 2)
SREA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module User’s Manual 3AUA0000042896 3)
MAINTENANCE MANUALS Code (EN)
Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, ACS310,
ACS350 and ACS/ACH550
3AFE68735190
1) Multilingual
2)
Delivered as a printed copy with the drive / optional equipment
3)
Delivered in PDF format with the drive / optional equipment
All manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet. See section Document library on the
Internet on page 333.

User’s Manual
ACS310
1. Safety
Table of contents
4. Mechanical installation
6. Electrical installation
8. Start-up and control with
I/O
3AUA0000044201 Rev A
EN
EFFECTIVE: 15.11.2008© 2008 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

Table of contents 5
Table of contents
List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. Safety
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Use of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety in installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safe start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2. Introduction to the manual
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Contents of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Categorization by frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Quick installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. Operation principle and hardware description
Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power connections and control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Type designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Type designation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4. Mechanical installation
Checking the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Checking the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Install the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fasten clamping plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5. Planning the electrical installation
Safety

6 Table of contents
Implementing the AC power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
European union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Other regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and
against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload . . . . . 42
Protecting the motor against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Implementing a bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Protecting the contacts of relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6. Electrical installation
Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Input power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner grounded TN systems . . . . . . . 46
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Default I/O connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting the embedded fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7. Installation checklist
Checking the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8. Start-up and control with I/O

Table of contents 7
How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
How to start up the drive without a control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
How to perform a manual start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
How to perform a guided start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9. Control panels
About control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Reference mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Basic Control Panel alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Assistants mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Changed Parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fault Logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Time and Date mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Parameter Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
I/O Settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10. Application macros
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
ABB Standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Motor Potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PFC Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

8 Table of contents
Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
SPFC Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
11. Program features
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Programmable analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Programmable relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Frequency input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
DC Magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Table of contents 9
Maintenance trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Custom U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
IR compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Panel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Preprogrammed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Supply phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Process controller PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
External/Trim controller PID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

10 Table of contents
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Energy optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Pump cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
PFC and SPFC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
PFC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
SPFC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
12. Actual signals and parameters
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fieldbus equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Default values with different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Actual signals in the short parameter view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
04 FAULT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Parameters in the short parameter view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
16 SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
All actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
01 OPERATING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
04 FAULT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
All parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
15 ANALOG OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16 SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Table of contents 11
18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
29 MAINTENANCE TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
34 PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
36 TIMED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
37 USER LOAD CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
40 PROCESS PID SET 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
42 EXT / TRIM PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
44 PUMP PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
45 ENERGY SAVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
46 PUMP CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
52 PANEL COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
53 EFB PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
64 LOAD ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
81 PFC CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
98 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
13. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Control Word and Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Modbus mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Register mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
ABB Drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
DCU communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

14. Fault tracing
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Alarm and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Embedded fieldbus faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
No master device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Same device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
15. Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Reforming the capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Cleaning the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
16. Technical data
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Power cable sizes and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Dimensions, weights and free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Losses, cooling data and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Losses and cooling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Electric power network specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Motor connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Control connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Table of contents 13
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Category C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Category C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
RoHS marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Liability limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Patent protection in the USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
17. Dimensions
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Frame size R2, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Frame size R3, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Frame size R4, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Further information
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Safety 15
1
Safety
What this chapter contains
The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the drive.
Use of warnings
Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment, and advise on how to avoid the danger. The
following warning symbols are used in this manual:
Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical
injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by
electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

16 Safety
Safety in installation and maintenance
These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
Electrical safety
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or
death, or damage to the equipment.
Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive!
• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when input power is applied. After
disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate
circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or motor
cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm) that
there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the
ground.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous
voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive.
• If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system (an
ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power
system), the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter
capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the drive.
• If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded
TN system, the drive will be damaged.
• All ELV (extra low voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used within a
zone of equipotential bonding, ie within a zone where all simultaneously
accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous
voltages appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory
grounding.
Note:
• Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the power
circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2.

Safety 17
General safety
• The drive is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive;
contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for
replacement.
• Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation.
Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to
malfunction.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
Safe start-up and operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation, start up or operate the
drive.
General safety
• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and
all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds
above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the
power line.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur.
When activated, these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a
fault.
• Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device
(disconnecting means); use instead the control panel start and stop keys and
or external commands (I/O or fieldbus). The maximum allowed number of
charging cycles of the DC capacitors (ie power-ups by applying power) is two per
minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000.
Note:
• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start
immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is
configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
• When the control location is not set to local (LOC not shown on the display), the
stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop the drive using the
control panel, first press the LOC/REM key and then the stop key .LOC
REM

18 Safety

Introduction to the manual 19
2
Introduction to the manual
The chapter describes applicability, target audience and purpose of this manual. It
describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more
information. The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery,
installing and commissioning the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in
this manual.
Applicability
The manual is applicable to the ACS310 drive firmware version 4.00E or later. See
parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 202.
Target audience
The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical
components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given.
Purpose of the manual
This manual provides information needed for planning the installation, installing,
commissioning, using and servicing the drive.

20 Introduction to the manual
Contents of this manual
The manual consists of the following chapters:
• Safety (page 15) gives safety instructions you must follow when installing,
commissioning, operating and servicing the drive.
• Introduction to the manual (this chapter, page 19) describes applicability, target
audience, purpose and contents of this manual. It also contains a quick
installation and commissioning flowchart.
• Operation principle and hardware description (page 23) describes the operation
principle, layout, power connections and control interfaces, type designation label
and type designation information in short.
• Mechanical installation (page 29) tells how to check the installation site, unpack,
check the delivery and install the drive mechanically.
• Planning the electrical installation (page 35) tells how to check the compatibility of
the motor and the drive and select cables, protections and cable routing.
• Electrical installation (page 45) tells how to check the insulation of the assembly
and the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner grounded TN systems as
well as connect power cables, control cables and embedded fieldbus.
• Installation checklist (page 45) contains a checklist for checking the mechanical
and electrical installation of the drive.
• Start-up and control with I/O (page 57) tells how to start up the drive as well as
how to start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor
speed through the I/O interface.
• Application macros (page 99) gives a brief description of each application macro
together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections. It also
explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it.
• Program features (page 111) describes program features with lists of related user
settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages.
• Actual signals and parameters (page 149) describes actual signals and
parameters. It also lists the default values for the different macros.
• Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus (page 265) tells how the drive can be
controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded
fieldbus.
• Fault tracing (page 287) tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It lists all
alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
• Maintenance and hardware diagnostics (page 303) contains preventive
maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions.
• Technical data (page 307) contains technical specifications of the drive, eg
ratings, sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the
requirements for CE and other marks.
• Dimensions (page 323) shows dimension drawings of the drive.

Introduction to the manual 21
• Further information (inside of the back cover, page 333) tells how to make product
and service inquiries, get information on product training, provide feedback on
ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet.
Related documents
See List of related manuals on page 2.
Categorization by frame size
The ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other
information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the
frame size (R0…R4). To identify the frame size of your drive, see the table in section
Ratings on page 308.

22 Introduction to the manual
Quick installation and commissioning flowchart
Task See
Identify the frame size of your drive: R0…R4. Operation principle and hardware description:
Type designation key on page 27
Technical data: Ratings on page 308
Plan the installation: select the cables, etc.
Check the ambient conditions, ratings and
required cooling air flow.
Planning the electrical installation on page 35
Technical data on page 307
Unpack and check the drive. Mechanical installation: Unpacking on page
31
If the drive will be connected to an IT
(ungrounded) or corner grounded system,
check that the internal EMC filter is not
connected.
Operation principle and hardware description:
Type designation key on page 27
Electrical installation: Checking the
compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner
grounded TN systems on page 46
Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation on page 29
Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the
cables on page 39
Check the insulation of the input cable and the
motor and the motor cable.
Electrical installation: Checking the insulation
of the assembly on page 45
Connect the power cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the power
cables on page 47
Connect the control cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the control
cables on page 49
Check the installation. Installation checklist on page 55
Commission the drive. Start-up and control with I/O on page 57

Operation principle and hardware description 23
3
Operation principle and
hardware description
The chapter briefly describes the operation principle, layout, type designation label
and type designation information. It also shows a general diagram of power
connections and control interfaces.
Operation principle
The ACS310 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC motors.
The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive. The rectifier
converts three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. The capacitor bank of the
intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage. The inverter converts the DC voltage
back to AC voltage for the AC motor.
AC motor
M
3~
Rectifier Intermediate
circuit
AC supply
Inverter

24 Operation principle and hardware description
Product overview
Layout
The layout of the drive is presented below. The figure shows a frame size R2 drive.
The construction of the different frame sizes R0…R4 varies to some extent.
1 Cooling outlet through top cover
2 Mounting holes
3 Panel cover (a) / Basic Control Panel (b) /
Assistant Control Panel (c)
4 Terminal cover
5 Panel connection
6 Option connection
7 FlashDrop connection
8 Power OK and Fault LEDs. See section
LEDs on page 306.
9 EMC filter grounding screw (EMC).
Note: The screw is on the front in frame
size R4.
10 Varistor grounding screw (VAR)
11 RS-485 connection
12 Jumper J701 for connecting RS-485
termination resistor
13 I/O connections
14 Switch S1 for selecting voltage or current
for analog inputs
15 Input power connection (U1, V1, W1) and
motor connection (U2, V2, W2). (Braking
chopper connection is disabled.)
16 I/O clamping plate
17 Clamping plate
18 Clamps
2
4
3b
3a
3c
5
6
7
8
13
2
1110
9
8
15
18
18
16
17
1
12
14
Covers on (R2) Covers off (R2)

Power connections and control interfaces
The diagram gives an overview of connections. I/O connections are parameterable.
See chapter Application macros on page 99 for I/O connections for the different
macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 45 for installation in general.
RONO
RONC
3
9
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
+24 VAux. voltage output
+24 V DC, max. 200 mA
DOSRC
GND
DCOM
DOOUT
DOGND
Digital/frequency output,
PNP transistor type
30 V DC, max. 100 mA
Relay output
250 V AC / 30 V DC / 6 A
V
mAGND
+10V
Reference voltage
+10 V DC, max. 10 mA
AI2Analog input 2
GND
AI1Analog input 1
0…10 V
SCRScreen
Analog output
0…20 mAAI1
AI2
L1
3-phase power
supply,
200…480 V AC
U2
V2
W2
AC motor
M
3 ~
EMC
VAR
EMC filter grounding screw
Varistor grounding screw
ROCOM
PROGRAMMABLE RELAY
AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Control panel
(RJ-45)
Modbus RTU
(RS-232)
Output relay
module MREL-01
11 17
18
19
20
21
22
AO 7
GND 8
12
13
14
15
16
10
L2
L3
PE
6
5
1
2
SHIELD
B
A
GND_A
23
24
25
26
Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
PROGRAMMABLE
DIGITAL INPUTS
4
FlashDrop
U1
V1
W1
S1
J701
8
6
6
DI5 can also be used
as a frequency input

Type designation label
The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive. An example label
and explanation of the label contents are shown below.
ACS310-03E-09A7-4
IP20 / UL Open type lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
S/N MYYWWRXXXX
4 kW (5 HP) llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
U1 3~380…480 V 3AUA0000039632
I1 15.0 A
f1 48…63 Hz
U2 3~0…U1 V
I2 9.7 A RoHS
f2 0…500 Hz
1 Type designation, see section Type designation key on page 27
2 Degree of protection by enclosure (IP and UL/NEMA)
3 Nominal ratings, see section Ratings on page 308.
4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where
M: Manufacturer
YY: 08, 09, 10, …, for 2008, 2009, 2010, …
WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
R: A, B, C, … for product revision number
XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001
5 ABB MRP code of the drive
6 CE marking and C-Tick, C-UL US and RoHS marks (the label of your drive shows the valid
markings)
5
6
4
3
2
1

Type designation key
The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of
the drive. You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the
drive. The first digits from the left express the basic configuration, for example
ACS310-03E-09A7-4. The optional selections are given after that, separated by +
signs, for example +J404. The explanations of the type designation selections are
described below.
ACS310 product series
03 = 3-phase input
3-phase
In format xxAy, where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part,
eg 09A7 means 9.7 A.
For more information, see section Ratings on page 308.
2 = 200…240 V AC
4 = 380…480 V AC
Input voltage range
E = EMC filter connected, 50 Hz frequency
U = EMC filter disconnected, 60 Hz frequency
Configuration
J404 = ACS-CP-C Basic Control Panel 1)
J400 = ACS-CP-A Assistant Control Panel 2)
R700 = ACS310 User’s Manual in English (3AUA0000044201 [EN])
R701 = ACS310 User’s Manual in German (3AUA0000048396 [DE])
R702 = ACS310 User’s Manual in Italian (3AUA0000048398 [IT])
R707 = ACS310 User’s Manual in French (3AUA0000048400 [FR])
R708 = ACS310 User’s Manual in Spanish (3AUA0000048401 [ES])
1) The ACS310 is compatible with ACS-CP-C Basic Control Panel Rev M or later.
2) The ACS310 is compatible with ACS-CP-A Assistant Control Panel Rev E or later (new
panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX, where year
YY = 07 or greater and revision R = E, F, G, …)
(The ACS310 is compatible with ACS-CP-D Assistant Control Panel Rev P or later. Unlike
the other panels, the ACS-CP-D is ordered with a separate material code.)
Options
ACS310-03E-09A7-4+J404+...
Output current rating

Mechanical installation 29
4
Mechanical installation
The chapter tells how to check the installation site, unpack, check the delivery and
install the drive mechanically.
Checking the installation site
The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet. Check the enclosure
requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations (see chapter
Technical data on page 307.
The drive can be installed in three different ways, depending on the frame size:
a) back mounting (all frame sizes)
b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2)
c) DIN rail mounting (all frame sizes).
The drive must be installed in an upright position.
Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter
Dimensions on page 323 for frame details.
Requirements for the installation site
Operation conditions
See chapter Technical data on page 307 for the allowed operation conditions of the
drive.
Wall
The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible, of non-flammable
material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive.

30 Mechanical installation
Floor
The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable.
Free space around the drive
The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm (3 in). No
free space is required on the sides of the drive, so drives can be installed side by
side.
Required tools
To install the drive, you need the following tools:
• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
• wire stripper
• tape measure
• drill (if the drive will be installed with screws/bolts)
• mounting hardware: screws or bolts (if the drive will be installed with screws/
bolts). For the number of screws/bolts, see With screws on page 32.

Unpacking
The drive (1) is delivered in a package that also contains the following items (frame
size R2 shown in the figure):
• plastic bag (2) including clamping plate (also used for I/O cables in frame sizes
R3 and R4), I/O clamping plate (for frame sizes R0…R2), clamps and screws
• panel cover (3)
• mounting template, integrated into the package (4)
• short user’s manual (5)
• possible options (Basic Control Panel, Assistant Control Panel or complete User’s
Manual).
Checking the delivery
Check that there are no signs of damage. Notify the shipper immediately if damaged
components are found.
Before attempting installation and operation, check the information on the type
designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type. See section
Type designation label on page 26.
2
1
3
5
4

Installing
The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection. To
comply with NEMA 1, use the MUL-R1, MUL-R3 or MUL-R4 option kit, which is
delivered with multilingual installation instructions (3AFE68642868, 3AFE68643147
or 3AUA0000025916, respectively).
Install the drive
Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate.
Note: Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation.
With screws
1. Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the
package. The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter
Dimensions on page 323. The number and location of the holes used depend on
how the drive is installed:
a) back mounting (frame sizes R0…R4): four holes
b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2): three holes; one of the bottom holes is
located in the clamping plate.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
1 22

3. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall.
4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely.
On DIN rail
1. Click the drive to the rail.
To detach the drive, press the release lever on top of the drive (1b).
3 4
1 1b

Fasten clamping plates
1. Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided
screws.
2. For frame sizes R0…R2, fasten the I/O clamping plate to the clamping plate with
the provided screws.
1
2

Planning the electrical installation 35
5
Planning the electrical
installation
The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the
compatibility of the motor and drive, and selecting cables, protections, cable routing
and way of operation for the drive.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the
recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems
that the warranty does not cover.
Implementing the AC power line connection
See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 314.
Use a fixed connection to the AC power line.
WARNING! As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3.5 mA, a
fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800-5-1.
Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting
means)
Install a hand-operated supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.

36 Planning the electrical installation
European union
To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety of
Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types:
• a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
• a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
• a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
Other regions
The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations.
Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive
Check that the 3-phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to
the rating table in section Ratings on page 308. The table lists the typical motor power
for each drive type.
Selecting the power cables
General rules
Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations.
• The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding
load currents. See section Ratings on page 308 for the rated currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C maximum permissible temperature of
the conductor in continuous use. For US, see section Additional US requirements
on page 38.
• The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase
conductor (same cross-sectional area).
• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC.
• Refer to chapter Technical data on page 307 for the EMC requirements.
A symmetrical shielded motor cable (see the figure below) must be used to meet the
EMC requirements of the CE and C-Tick marks.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but a shielded symmetrical
cable is recommended.
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of a symmetrical shielded cable
reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing
currents and wear.

Alternative power cable types
Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below.
Motor cable shield
To function as a protective conductor, the shield must have the same cross-sectional
area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal.
To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield
conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The
requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum
requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a
concentric layer of copper wires. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the
emission level and bearing currents.
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase
conductors, a concentric or otherwise
symmetrically constructed PE conductor
and a shield
Motor cables
(recommended for input cables also)
PE
conductor
and shield
Shield Shield
PE
PE
Allowed as input cables
A four-conductor system: three phase
conductors and a protective conductor
Note: A separate PE conductor is required
if the conductivity of the cable shield is not
sufficient for the purpose.
Shield
PEPE
Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core

Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used.
The power cables must be rated for 75 °C (167 °F).
Conduit
Where conduits must be coupled together, bridge the joint with a ground conductor
bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to the drive
enclosure. Use separate conduits for input power, motor and control wiring. Do not
run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.
Armored cable / shielded power cable
Six-conductor (three phases and three ground) type MC continuous corrugated
aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following
suppliers (trade names in parentheses):
• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)
• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)
• Oaknite (CLX).
Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers:
• Belden
• LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX)
• Pirelli.
Selecting the control cables
General rules
All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, for example JAMAK by Draka NK
Cables) for analog signals. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do
not use common return for different analog signals.

A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals, but a
single-shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
However, for frequency input, always use a shielded cable.
Run analog and digital signals in separate cables.
Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals are run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.
Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (for example ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL)
has been tested and approved by ABB.
Control panel cable
In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed
3 m (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
option kits.
Routing the cables
Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic
interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at
an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding
electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of
potential.
Double-shielded twisted
multipair cable
Single-shielded twisted
multipair cable
a b

A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.
Control cable ducts
Drive
Motor cable
Power cable
min. 300 mm (12 in)
Motor cable
min. 200 mm (8 in)
Input power cable
Control cables
90° min. 500 mm (20 in)
Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in
separate ducts inside the cabinet.
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is
insulated for 230 V or insulated with an
insulation sleeving for 230 V.
230 V24 V 230 V24 V

Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor
cable in short circuit situations and against thermal
overload
Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations
Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines.
1)
Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 307. The
fuses will protect the input cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent
damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the drive.
2)
Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used. Fuses must
be used with other circuit breakers. Contact your local ABB representative for the approved
breaker types and supply network characteristics.
WARNING! Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit
breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may escape
from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure safe use, special
attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations
The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional protection devices are needed.
Circuit diagram Short-circuit protection
Protect the drive and input
cable with fuses or a
circuit breaker. See
footnotes 1) and 2).M
3~
Distribution
board
Input cable
M
3~
Drive
I>
1)
2)

Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against
thermal overload
The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional thermal protection devices are needed.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal
overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and
motor. These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.
Protecting the motor against thermal overload
According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to
the drive. The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature
measurement function further by parameters.
The most common temperature sensors are:
• motor sizes IEC180…225: thermal switch (for example Klixon)
• motor sizes IEC200…250 and larger: PTC or Pt100.
For more information on the thermal model, see section Motor Thermal Protection on
page 130. For more information on the temperature measurement function see
section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 139.
Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive
ACS310-03x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B.
Other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, such as separation
from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply
system by a transformer, can also be applied.
Implementing a bypass connection
WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2,
V2 and W2. Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the drive.
If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches or
contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line
and drive output terminals simultaneously.

Protecting the contacts of relay outputs
Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits (varistors, RC filters [AC] or
diodes [DC]) in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed,
the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the
control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.
Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the I/O terminal block.
Drive
relay
output
Drive
relay
output
Drive
relay
output
Varistor
RC filter
Diode
230 V AC
24 V DC
230 V AC

Electrical installation 45
6
Electrical installation
The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility
with IT (ungrounded) and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power
cables, control cables and embedded fieldbus.
WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a
qualified electrician. Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15.
Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during
installation. If the drive is already connected to the input power, wait for
5 minutes after disconnecting the input power.
Checking the insulation of the assembly
Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (for example hi-pot
or megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has
been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory.
Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing
voltage automatically.
Input power cable
Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.

46 Electrical installation
Motor and motor cable
Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the
drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase
conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a
measuring voltage of 500 V DC. The insulation resistance
of an ABB motor must exceed 10 Mohm (reference value
at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other
motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If
moisture is suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement.
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and
corner grounded TN systems
WARNING! If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT
system (an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded [over
30 ohms] power system), the system will be connected to ground potential through
the EMC filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the drive.
If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN
system, the drive will be damaged.
1. If you have an IT (ungrounded) or corner grounded TN system, disconnect the
internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw. For 3-phase U-type drives (with
type designation ACS310-03U-), the EMC screw is already removed at the factory
and replaced by a plastic one.
ohm
U1
3~
MV1
W1
PE
Note: In frame size R4
the EMC screw is located
to the right of terminal W2.
1
EMC
VAR

Connecting the power cables
Connection diagram
U2 V2 W2
INPUT
1)
Drive
For alternatives, see section
Selecting the supply
disconnecting device
(disconnecting means) on
page 35.
OUTPUT
U1 V1 W1
Motor
3 ~
V1
U1 W1
PE
PE
L1 L2 L3
1)
Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board.
2)
Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient (smaller
than the conductivity of the phase conductor) and there is no symmetrically constructed
grounding conductor in the cable. See section Selecting the power cables on page 36.
Note:
Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable.
If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to
the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive
and motor ends.
Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately. For more
information, see section Routing the cables on page 39.
Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end
For minimum radio frequency interference:
• ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows:
flattened width > 1/5 · length
• or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-
through of the motor terminal box. a b
b > 1/5 · a
2)

Connection procedure
1. Fasten the grounding conductor (PE) of the input power cable under the
grounding clamp. Connect the phase conductors to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals.
Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m
(15 lbf·in) for R3, and 2.5 N·m (22 lbf·in) for R4.
2. Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible.
Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp. Connect the phase
conductors to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals. Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m
(7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m (15 lbf·in) for R3, and 2.5 N·m (22 lbf·in)
for R4.
3. Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically.
1
1
2
2
2

Connecting the control cables
I/O terminals
The figure below shows the I/O terminals. Tightening torque is 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
Voltage and current selection for analog inputs
Switch S1 selects voltage (0 [2]…10 V / -10…10 V) or current (0 [4]…20 mA /
-20…20 mA) as the signal types for analog inputs AI1 and AI2. The factory settings
are unipolar voltage for AI1 (0 [2]…10 V) and unipolar current for AI2 (0 [4]…20 mA),
which correspond to the default usage in the application macros. The switch is
located to the left of I/O terminal 9 (see the I/O terminal figure above).
X1A:
1: SCR
2: AI1
3: GND
4: +10 V
5: AI2
6: GND
7: AO
8: GND
9: +24 V
10: GND
11: DCOM
12: DI1
13: DI2
14: DI3
15: DI4
16: DI5 digital or frequency input
X1B:
17: ROCOM
18: RONC
19: RONO
20: DOSRC
21: DOOUT
22: DOGND
X1C:
23: SCR
24: B
25: A
26: GND_A
mA
V
S1
X1A X1B
X1CJ701
AI1
AI2
J701: Connects 120 ohm termination resistor. See page
54.
S1: Selects voltage or current as the signal types for
analog inputs AI1 and AI2.
AI1
AI2
Top position: I (0 [4]…20 mA, default for AI2; or -20…20 mA)
Bottom position: U (0 [2]…10 V, default for AI1; or -10…10 V)
S1

Voltage and current connection for analog inputs
Bipolar voltage (-10…10 V) and current (-20…20 mA) are also possible. If a bipolar
connection is used instead of a unipolar one, see section Programmable analog
inputs on page 120 for how to set parameters accordingly.
PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs
You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.
External power supply for digital inputs
For using an external +24 V supply for the digital inputs, see the figure below.
Frequency input
If DI5 is used as a frequency input, see section Frequency input on page 123 for how
to set parameters accordingly.
SCR
AI
+10V
1…10 kohm
Unipolar voltage
+10 V GND -10 V
Bipolar voltage Unipolar/Bipolar current
Use external power supply.
GND
SCR
AI
GND
SCR
AI
GND
9 +24V
10 GND
11 DCOM
12 DI1
13 DI2
14 DI3
15 DI4
16 DI5
9 +24V
10 GND
11 DCOM
12 DI1
13 DI2
14 DI3
15 DI4
16 DI5
X1X1
NPN connection (sink)PNP connection (source)
NPN connection (sink)PNP connection (source)
9 +24V
10 GND
11 DCOM
12 DI1
13 DI2
14 DI3
15 DI4
16 DI5
9 +24V
10 GND
11 DCOM
12 DI1
13 DI2
14 DI3
15 DI4
16 DI5
X1X1
+24 V DC
0 V DC
0 V DC
+24 V DC

Connection example of a two-wire sensor
Hand/Auto, PID Control, PFC Control and SPFC Control macros (see section
Application macros on page 99) use analog input 2 (AI2). The macro wiring diagrams
for these macros show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used.
The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two-wire sensor.
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus the output signal must
be 4…20 mA.
X1A
5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference,
4…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm6 GND
…
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
+24 V DC, max. 200 mA10 GND
P
I
4…20 mA

Default I/O connection diagram
The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in
use, which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO.
The default macro is the ABB Standard macro. It provides a general purpose I/O
configuration with three constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values
given in section Default values with different macros on page 151. For information on
other macros, see chapter Application macros on page 99.
The default I/O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below.
X1A
1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V
3 GND Analog input circuit common
4 +10V Reference voltage: +10 V DC, max. 10 mA
5 AI2 Not in use by default. 0…10 V
7 AO Output frequency value: 0…20 mA
8 GND Analog output circuit common
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output: +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
11 DCOM Digital input common
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
14 DI3 Constant speed selection 1)
16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection 2)
X1B
17 ROCOM Relay output 1
No fault [Fault (-1)]18 RONC
19 RONO
20 DOSRC Digital output, max. 100 mA
No fault [Fault (-1)]21 DOOUT
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
1…10 kohm
3)
1)
See parameter group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS:
2)
0 = ramp times according to parameters
2202 and 2203.
2205 and 2206.
3)
360 degree grounding under a clamp.
Tightening torque = 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter)
0 0 Set speed through AI1
1 0 Speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)

Connection procedure
1. Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the
cover off the frame.
2. Digital signals: Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees
and ground the bare shield under the clamp.
3. Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals.
4. For double-shielded cables, twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in
the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1).
5. Analog signals: Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees
and ground the bare shield under the clamp.
6. Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals.
7. Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together
and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1).
8. Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically.
9. Slide the terminal cover back in place.
2
4
3
4
2
1
5
7
4
5
6
7
9

Connecting the embedded fieldbus
Embedded fieldbus can be connected to the drive with RS-485 or RS-232.
Connection diagram
RS-485
The figure below shows the fieldbus connection.
Terminate the RS-485 bus with a 120 ohm resistor at the end of the network by
setting the jumper J701 shunts as in the figure below.
RS-232
Plug a communication cable into the control panel connection X2. The cable must be
shorter than 3 meters.
X1C
23 SCR Fieldbus cable shield (screen)
24 B Positive
25 A Negative
25 GND_A Fieldbus common
SCR
+
-
GND
SCR GND_AABJ701
X1C
J701 Fieldbus
Fieldbus
controller
Jumper shunts
connect the
120 ohm
termination
resistor.
J701J701
RS-484
RS-232
Fieldbus
controller
< 3 m

Installation checklist 55
7
Installation checklist
Checking the installation
Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go
through the checklist below together with another person. Read chapter Safety on
page 15 of this manual before you work on the drive.
Check
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The ambient operating conditions are allowed. (See Mechanical installation: Checking the
installation site on page 29 as well as Technical data: Losses, cooling data and noise on
page 312 and Ambient conditions on page 316.)
The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical
installation on page 29.)
The cooling air will flow freely. (See Mechanical installation: Free space around the drive
on page 30.)
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical
installation: Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 36 as well as
Technical data: Motor connection data on page 314.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation on page 35 and
Electrical installation on page 45.)
For ungrounded and corner grounded systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected
(EMC screw removed).
The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year.
The drive is grounded properly.
The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The input power connections at U1, V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct
torque.
Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque.

56 Installation checklist
The motor cable, input power cable and control cables are routed separately.
The external control (I/O) connections are OK.
The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with a bypass
connection).
Terminal cover and, for NEMA 1, hood and connection box, are in place.
Check

Start-up and control with I/O 57
8
Start-up and control with I/O
The chapter tells how to:
• perform the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the
motor through the I/O interface
Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For
details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels on page 67.
How to start up the drive
WARNING! The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified
electrician.
The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 15 must be followed during
the start-up procedure.
The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on
and the drive is in the remote control mode.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the
driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation.
Note: By default, parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 (SHORT VIEW),
and you cannot see all actual signals and parameters. To be able to view them, set
parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW).

58 Start-up and control with I/O
• Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page
55.
How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have, if any.
• If you have no control panel, follow the instructions given in section How to start
up the drive without a control panel. on page 58.
• If you have a Basic Control Panel, follow the instructions given in section How
to perform a manual start-up on page 59.
• If you have an Assistant Control Panel, you can either run the Start-up
Assistant (see section How to perform a guided start-up on page 62) or perform a
manual start-up (see section How to perform a manual start-up on page 59).
The Start-up Assistant, which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only,
guides you through all essential settings to be done. In the manual start-up, the
drive gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the
instructions given in section How to perform a manual start-up on page 59.
How to start up the drive without a control panel.
POWER-UP
Apply input power and wait for a moment.
Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking.
The drive is now ready for use.

How to perform a manual start-up
For the manual start-up, you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control
Panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays
shown are the Basic Control Panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the
Assistant Control Panel only.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
POWER-UP
Apply input power.
The Basic Control Panel powers up into the
Output mode.
The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to
run the Start-up Assistant. If you press , the
Start-up Assistant is not run, and you can
continue with manual start-up in a similar manner
as described below for the Basic Control Panel.
MANUAL ENTRY OF START-UP DATA (parameter group 99)
If you have an Assistant Control Panel, select the
language (the Basic Control Panel does not
support languages). See parameter 9901 for the
values of the available language alternatives.
For instructions on how to set parameters with the
Assistant Control Panel, see section Assistant Control
Panel on page 78.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate: Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as on
the motor nameplate. For
example, if the motor nominal
speed is 1440 rpm on the
nameplate, setting the value of
parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM
SPEED to 1500 rpm results in
the wrong operation of the
drive.
• motor nominal voltage (parameter 9905)
Setting of parameter 9905 is shown below as an
example of parameter setting with the Basic Control
Panel. You find more detailed instructions in section
Basic Control Panel on page 68.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
00.
EXIT
EXIT OK00:00
REM CHOICE
Do you want to
use the start-up
assistant?
Yes
No
9901 LANGUAGE
CANCEL SAVE00:00
REM PAR EDIT
[0]
ENGLISH
M2AA 200 MLA 4
1475
1475
1470
1470
1475
1770
32.5
56
34
59
54
59
0.83
0.83
0.83
0.83
0.83
0.83
3GAA 202 001 - ADA
180
IEC 34-1
6210/C36312/C3
Cat. no
35
30
30
30
30
3050
50
50
50
50
60
690 Y
400 D
660 Y
380 D
415 D
440 D
V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s
Ins.cl. F IP 55
No
IEC 200 M/L 55
3 motor
ABB Motors
380 V
supply
voltage
REM
PAR FWD
9905

1. To go to the Main menu, press if the bottom
line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.
2. Press keys / until you see “PAr”, and
press .
3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys
/ and press .
4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with
keys / .
5. Press and hold for about two seconds until the
parameter value is shown with under the value.
6. Change the value with keys / . The value
changes faster while you keep the key pressed
down.
7. Save the parameter value by pressing .
Enter the rest of the motor data:
• motor nominal current (parameter 9906)
Allowed range: 0.2…2.0 · I2N A
• motor nominal frequency (parameter 9907)
• motor nominal speed (parameter 9908)
• motor nominal power (parameter 9909)
Select the application macro (parameter 9902)
according to how the control cables are
connected. The default value 1 (ABB
STANDARD) is suitable in most cases.
REM
MENU FWD
rEF
REM
PAR FWD
-01-
REM
PAR FWD
9901
REM
PAR FWD
9905
SET
V
REM
PAR SET FWD
400
V
REM
PAR SET FWD
380
REM
PAR FWD
9905
REM
PAR FWD
9906
REM
PAR FWD
9907
REM
PAR FWD
9908
REM
PAR FWD
9909
REM
PAR FWD
9902

DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION
Check the direction of the motor rotation.
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on
the left), switch to local control by pressing .
• To go to the Main menu, press if the
bottom line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press
repeatedly until you see MENU at the
bottom.
• Press keys / until you see “rEF” and
press .
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to
a small value with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is
the same as indicated on the display (FWD
means forward and REV reverse).
• Press to stop the motor.
To change the direction of the motor rotation:
• If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not
visible, first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER
VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW).
• Invert the phases by changing the value of
parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie from 0 (NO)
to 1 (YES), or vice versa.
• Verify your work by applying input power and
repeating the check as described above. Set
parameter 9914 back to 2 (SHORT VIEW).
FINAL CHECK
Check that the drive state is OK.
Basic Control Panel: Check that there are no
faults or alarms shown on the display. If you want
to check the LEDs on the front of the drive, switch
first to remote control (otherwise a fault is
generated) before removing the panel and
verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green
LED is lit but not blinking.
Assistant Control Panel: Check that there are no
faults or alarms shown on the display and that the
panel LED is green and does not blink.
LOC
REM
LOC
Hz
SET FWD
xxx.
forward
direction
reverse
direction
LOC
PAR FWD
1611
LOC
PAR FWD
9914

How to perform a guided start-up
To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the Assistant Control Panel.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
POWER-UP
Apply input power. The control panel first asks if you
want to use the Start-up Assistant.
• Press (when is highlighted) to run the
Start-up Assistant.
• Press if you do not want to run the Start-up
Assistant.
• Press key to highlight and then press
if you want to make the panel ask (or not ask) the
question about running the Start-up Assistant
again the next time you switch on the power to the
drive.
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE
If you decided to run the Start-up Assistant, the
display then asks you to select the language. Scroll
to the desired language with keys / and
press to accept.
If you press , the Start-up Assistant is stopped.
STARTING THE GUIDED SET-UP
The Start-up Assistant now guides you through the
set-up tasks, starting with the motor set-up. Set the
motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor
nameplate.
Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys /
and press to accept and continue with the
Start-up Assistant.
Note: At any time, if you press , the Start-up
Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the
Output mode.
The basic start-up is now completed. However, it
might be useful at this stage to set the parameters
required by your application and continue with the
application set-up as suggested by the Start-up
Assistant.
OK
Yes
EXIT
Do you want to
use the start-up
assistant?
EXIT OK00:00
REM CHOICE
Yes
No
No
OK
Show start-up
assistant on
next boot?
EXIT OK00:00
REM CHOICE
Yes
No
SAVE
EXIT
9901 LANGUAGE
EXIT SAVE00:00
REM PAR EDIT
[0]
ENGLISH
SAVE
EXIT
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT SAVE00:00
REM PAR EDIT
220 V
Do you want to
continue with
application setup?
EXIT OK00:00
REM CHOICE
Continue
Skip

Select the application macro according to which the
control cables are connected.
Continue with the application set-up. After
completing a set-up task, the Start-up Assistant
suggests the next one.
• Press (when is highlighted) to
continue with the suggested task.
• Press key to highlight and then press
to move to the following task without doing the
suggested task.
• Press to stop the Start-up Assistant.
DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION
Check the direction of the motor rotation.
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the
status line), switch to local control by pressing .
• If you are not in the Output mode, press
repeatedly until you get there.
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a
small value with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is the
same as indicated on the display ( means
forward and reverse).
• Press to stop the motor.
To change the direction of the motor rotation:
• If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not
visible, first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER
VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW).
• Invert the phases by changing the value of
parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie from 0 (NO) to
1 (YES), or vice versa.
• Verify your work by applying input power and
repeating the check as described above.
• Set parameter 9914 back to 2 (SHORT VIEW).
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT SAVE00:00
REM PAR EDIT
[1]
ABB STANDARD
OK
Continue
Skip
OK
EXIT
Do you want to
continue with
EXT1 reference setup?
EXIT OK00:00
REM CHOICE
Continue
Skip
LOC
REM
EXIT
DIR MENU00:00
LOC xx.xHz
xx x Hz.
x x A.
xx x %.
forward
direction
reverse
direction
1611 PARAMETER VIEW
CANCEL SAVE00:00
REM PAR EDIT
[3]
LONG VIEW
9914 PHASE INVERSION
CANCEL SAVE00:00
REM PAR EDIT
[1]
YES

FINAL CHECK
After the whole set-up is completed, check that there
are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the
panel LED is green and does not blink.

How to control the drive through the I/O interface
The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog
inputs when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (standard) parameter settings are valid.
Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
If you need to change the direction of rotation, check
that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3
(REQUEST).
Ensure that the control connections are wired
according to the connection diagram given for the
ABB Standard macro.
See section Default I/O
connection diagram on page
52.
Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key
to switch between remote and local control.
In remote control, the panel
display shows text REM.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR
Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast
and stops after the setpoint is reached
Assistant Control Panel: The arrow starts rotating. It
is dotted until the setpoint is reached.
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by
adjusting the voltage of analog input AI1.
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR
Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
STOPPING THE MOTOR
Switch digital input DI1 off. The motor stops.
Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly.
Assistant Control Panel: The arrow stops rotating.
LOC
REM
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
00.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
500.
REM Hz
OUTPUT REV
500.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
500.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
00.

Control panels 67
9
Control panels
The chapter describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and display fields. It
also instructs in using the panel in control, monitoring and changing the settings.
About control panels
Use a control panel to control the ACS310, read status data, and adjust parameters.
The drive works with either of two different control panel types:
• Basic Control Panel – This panel (described in section Basic Control Panel on
page 68) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values.
• Assistant Control Panel – This panel (described in section Assistant Control Panel
on page 78) includes pre-programmed assistants to automate the most common
parameter setups. The panel provides language support. It is available with
different language sets.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with the following versions:
• Basic Control Panel: ACS-CP-C Rev. M or later
• Assistant Control Panel: ACS-CP-A Rev. E or later
(new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX,
where year YY = 07 or greater and revision R = E, F, G, …)
• Assistant Control Panel (Asia): ACS-CP-D Rev. P or later.
See page 82 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel. See
parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different
Assistant Control Panels.

68 Control panels
Basic Control Panel
Features
The Basic Control Panel features:
• numeric control panel with an LCD display
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.

Control panels 69
Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control
Panel.
No. Use
1 LCD display – Divided into five areas:
a. Upper left – Control location:
LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the
control panel
REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive
I/O or fieldbus.
b. Upper right – Unit of the displayed value.
c. Center – Variable; in general, shows parameter
and signal values, menus or lists. Shows also
fault and alarm codes.
d. Lower left and center – Panel operation state:
OUTPUT: Output mode
PAR: Parameter mode
MENU: Main menu.
: Fault mode.
e. Lower right – Indicators:
FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation
Flashing slowly: stopped
Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint
Steady: running, at setpoint
: Displayed value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference modes).
2 RESET/EXIT – Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values.
Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes.
3 MENU/ENTER – Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode, saves the
displayed value as the new setting.
4 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list.
• Increases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increases the reference value in the Reference mode.
• Holding the key down changes the value faster.
5 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list.
• Decreases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode.
• Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
7 DIR – Changes the direction of the motor rotation.
8 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
9 START – Starts the drive in local control.
2 3
4
6 7
8 9
1b
1e
1a
1d
5
LOC A
OUTPUT FWD
11.1c
FAULT
SET

70 Control panels
Operation
You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys. You select an option,
eg operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and arrow keys until the
option is visible in the display and then pressing the key.
With the key, you return to the previous operation level without saving the made
changes.
The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes: Output, Reference, Parameter, Copy
and Fault. The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter. When a
fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the
fault or alarm code. You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see
chapter Fault tracing on page 287).
After the power is switched on, the panel is in the
Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the
direction, switch between local and remote control and
monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do
other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate mode.
How to do common tasks
The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and the page
number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to switch between local and remote control Any 71
How to start and stop the drive Any 71
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 71
How to browse the monitored signals Output 72
How to set the frequency reference Reference 73
How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 74
How to select the monitored signals Parameter 75
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 287
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 77
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 77
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.
REM
MENU FWD
PAr

Control panels 71
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation
You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on
the left) and local control (LOC shown on the left),
press .
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled
with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
After pressing the key, the display briefly shows
message “LoC” or “rE”, as appropriate, before
returning to the previous display.
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in
remote control (REM) and controlled through the
drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC)
and control the drive using the control panel, press
. The result depends on how long you press
the key:
• If you release the key immediately (the display
flashes “LoC”), the drive stops. Set the local
control reference as instructed on page 73.
• If you press the key for about two seconds
(release when the display changes from “LoC”
to “LoC r”), the drive continues as before. The
drive copies the current remote values for the
run/stop status and the reference, and uses
them as the initial local control settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing slowly.
• To start the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing rapidly. It
stops flashing when the drive
reaches the setpoint.
Step Action Display
1. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the
left), switch to local control by pressing . The
display briefly shows message “LoC” before
returning to the previous display.
2. To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at
the bottom) to reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or
vice versa, press .
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3
(REQUEST).
LOC
REM
LOC
Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.
LOC
FWD
LoC
LOC
REM
LOC
REM
LOC
Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.
LOC
Hz
OUTPUT REV
491.

72 Control panels
Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three group 01 OPERATING DATA signals, one
signal at a time
• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
You get to the Output mode by pressing until the display shows text OUTPUT at
the bottom.
The display shows the value of one group 01
OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the
right. Page 75 tells how to select up to three signals to
be monitored in the Output mode. The table below
shows how to view them one at a time.
How to browse the monitored signals
Step Action Display
1. If more than one signals have been selected to be
monitored (see page 75), you can browse them in
the Output mode.
To browse the signals forward, press key
repeatedly. To browse them backward, press key
repeatedly.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.
A
REM
OUTPUT FWD
05.
REM %
OUTPUT FWD
107.

Control panels 73
Reference mode
In the Reference mode, you can:
• set the frequency reference
How to set the frequency reference
Step Action Display
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in
the Output mode, otherwise by pressing
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the
left), switch to local control by pressing . The
display briefly shows “LoC” before switching to local
control.
Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you
can allow the reference modification in remote
control (REM).
3. If the panel is not in the Reference mode (“rEF” not
visible), press key or until you see “rEF”
and then press . Now the display shows the
current reference value with under the value.
4. • To increase the reference value, press .
• To decrease the reference value, press .
The value changes immediately when you press the
key. It is stored in the drive permanent memory and
restored automatically after power switch-off.
REM
MENU FWD
PAr
LOC
REM
LOC
MENU FWD
PAr
SET
LOC
MENU FWD
rEF
LOC
Hz
SET FWD
491.
LOC
Hz
SET FWD
500.

74 Control panels
Parameter mode
In the Parameter mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
• select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode
How to select a parameter and change its value
Step Action Display
2. If the panel is not in the Parameter mode (“PAr” not
visible), press key or until you see “PAr”
and then press . The display shows the number
of one of the parameter groups.
3. Use keys and to find the desired
parameter group.
4. Press . The display shows one of the
parameters in the selected group.
5. Use keys and to find the desired
parameter.
6. Press and hold for about two seconds until the
display shows the value of the parameter with
underneath indicating that changing of the value is
now possible.
Note: When is visible, pressing keys and
simultaneously changes the displayed value to
the default value of the parameter.
7. Use keys and to select the parameter
value. When you have changed the parameter value,
starts flashing.
• To save the displayed parameter value, press
.
• To cancel the new value and keep the original,
press .
LOC
MENU FWD
rEF
LOC
MENU FWD
PAr
LOC
PAR FWD
-01-
LOC
PAR FWD
-11-
LOC
PAR FWD
1101
LOC
PAR FWD
1103
SET
SET
LOC
PAR SET FWD
1
SET
LOC
PAR SET FWD
2
LOC
PAR FWD
1103

Control panels 75
How to select the monitored signals
Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the
Output mode and how they are displayed with group
34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 74 for
detailed instructions on changing parameter values.
By default, the display shows three signals:
Signal 1: 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT
Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE
To change the default signals, select up to three
signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be
shown.
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401
SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal
parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA
(= number of the parameter without the leading
zero), eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE.
Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3
(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM). For example, if 3401 = 0
and 3415 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the
signal specified by 3408 appears in the display. If all
three parameters are set to 0, ie no signals are
selected for monitoring, the panel displays text “n.A”.
2. Specify the decimal point location, or use the decimal
point location and unit of the source signal (setting 9
[DIRECT]). Bar graphs are not available for Basic
Operation Panel. For details, see parameter 3404.
Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This
has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405.
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the
minimum and maximum display values. This has no
effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and
3407.
Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407
OUTPUT1 MAX
OUTPUT2 MAX
OUTPUT3 MAX.
LOC
PAR SET FWD
103
LOC
PAR SET FWD
104
LOC
PAR SET FWD
105
LOC
PAR SET FWD
9
LOC
PAR SET FWD
3
LOC
Hz
PAR SET FWD
00.
LOC
Hz
PAR SET FWD
5000.

76 Control panels
Copy mode
The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user
sets of drive parameters to the control panel. The control panel memory is non-
volatile.
In the Copy mode, you can do the following:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL – Upload). This
includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the
user) parameters.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A –
Download All). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-
adjustable motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of
parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
• Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P – Download
Partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters,
parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL
parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u1 – Download
User Set 1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User macros on page 110)
and then uploaded to panel.
• Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u2 – Download
User Set 2). As dL u1 – Download User Set 1 above.
• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Control panels 77
How to upload and download parameters
For the upload and download functions available, see above.
Basic Control Panel alarm codes
In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Fault tracing
on page 287), the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of
form A5xxx. See section Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel on page 292
for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions.
Step Action Display
2. If the panel is not in the Copy mode (“CoPY” not
visible), press key or until you see
“CoPY”.
Press .
3. To upload all parameters (including user sets) from
the drive to the control panel, step to “uL” with keys
and .
Press . During the transfer, the display shows
the transfer status as a percentage of completion.
To perform downloads, step to the appropriate
operation (here “dL A”, Download all, is used as an
example) with keys and .
Press . During the transfer, the display shows
the transfer status as a percentage of completion.
LOC
MENU FWD
PAr
LOC
MENU FWD
CoPY
LOC
MENU FWD
uL
LOC
MENU FWD
uL
LOC
%
FWD
uL 50
LOC
MENU FWD
dL A
LOC
%
FWD
dL 50

78 Control panels
Assistant Control Panel
Features
The Assistant Control Panel features:
• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display
• language selection for the display
• Start-up Assistant to ease drive commissioning
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
• context sensitive help
• real time clock.

Control panels 79
Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant
Control Panel
No. Use
1 Status LED – Green for normal operation. If LED is
flashing, or red, see section LEDs on page 306.
2 LCD display – Divided into three main areas:
f. Status line – variable, depending on the mode of
operation, see section Status line on page 80.
g. Center – variable; in general, shows signal and
parameter values, menus or lists. Shows also
faults and alarms.
h. Bottom line – shows current functions of the two
soft keys and, if enabled, the clock display.
3 Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The
text in the lower left corner of the LCD display
indicates the function.
4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right corner of the
LCD display indicates the function.
5 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
8 Help – Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The information
displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display.
9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
10 START – Starts the drive in local control.
3 4
5
67 8
9 10
1
2a
2b
2c DIR 00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
MENU

80 Control panels
Status line
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-
sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the
display above each key.
You select an option, eg operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and
arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing
the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an
option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes
and return to the previous operation level.
The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes: Output, Parameters, Assistants,
Changed Parameters, Fault Logger, Time and Date, Parameter Backup, I/O Settings
and Fault. The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a
fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the
fault or alarm. You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing
on page 287).
No. Field Alternatives Significance
1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the
control panel.
REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive
I/O or fieldbus.
2 State Forward shaft direction
Reverse shaft direction
Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint.
Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint.
Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.
Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present, but the motor is
not running, eg because start enable is
missing.
3 Panel operation
mode
• Name of the current mode
• Name of the list or menu shown
• Name of the operation state, eg PAR
EDIT.
4 Reference value or
number of the
selected item
• Reference value in the Output mode
• Number of the highlighted item, eg
mode, parameter group or fault.
LOC MAIN MENU 1LOC 49.1Hz
1 2 4 1 2 3 4

Control panels 81
Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can
start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and
remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up
to three actual values.
To do other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate mode on the menu. The status line (see
section Status line on page 80) shows the name of the
current menu, mode, item or state.
How to do common tasks
The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to get help Any 82
How to find out the panel version At power up 82
How to adjust the display contrast Output 85
How to switch between local and remote control Any 83
How to start and stop the drive Any 84
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 84
How to set the frequency reference Output 85
How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 86
How to select the monitored signals Parameters 87
How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets)
with assistants
Assistants 89
How to view and edit changed parameters Changed
Parameters
91
How to view faults Fault Logger 92
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 287
How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the
clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to
the daylight saving changes
Time and Date 93
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter
Backup
96
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter
Backup
96
How to view backup information Parameter
Backup
97
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals I/O Settings 98
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1

82 Control panels
How to get help
How to find out the panel version
Step Action Display
1. Press to read the context-sensitive help text for the
item that is highlighted.
If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display.
2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys
and .
3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by
pressing .
Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
2. Keep key pressed down while you switch on the
power and read the information. The display shows the
following panel information:
Panel SW:panel firmware version
ROM CRC:panel ROM check sum
Flash Rev:flash content version
Flash content comment.
When you release the key, the panel goes to the
Output mode.
?
01 OPERATING DATA
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR GROUPS 10
This group defines
external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
EXIT 00:00
LOC HELP
external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
direction changes.
EXIT 00:00
LOC HELP
EXIT
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR GROUPS 10
?
?
PANEL VERSION INFO
Panel SW: x.xx
Rom CRC: xxxxxxxxxx
Flash Rev: x.xx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Control panels 83
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on the
status line) and local control (LOC shown on the status
line), press .
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with
parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in
remote control (REM) and controlled through the drive
I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and
control the drive using the control panel, press .
The result depends on how long you press the key:
• If you release the key immediately (the display
flashes “Switching to the local control mode”), the
drive stops. Set the local control reference as
instructed on page 85.
• If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive
continues as before. The drive copies the current
remote values for the run/stop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control
settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the
status line stops rotating.
• To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the
status line starts rotating. It
is dotted until the drive
reaches the setpoint.
LOC
REM
Switching to the
local control mode.
00:00
LOC MESSAGE
LOC
REM

84 Control panels
Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 01 OPERATING DATA
• change the direction of the motor rotation
• set the frequency reference
• adjust the display contrast
You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly.
The top right corner of the
display shows the reference
value. The center can be
configured to show up to three
signal values or bar graphs; see
page 87 for instructions on
selecting and modifying the monitored signals.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation
Step Action Display
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly
until you get there.
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status
line), switch to local control by pressing . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and
then returns to the Output mode.
3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the
status line) to reverse ( shown on the status line), or
vice versa, press .
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3
(REQUEST).
EXIT
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 5.0Hz
0 4 A.
24 4 %.
Hz 50%
EXIT
DIR MENU00:00
REM 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
LOC
REM
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
DIR
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.

Control panels 85
How to set the frequency reference
How to adjust the display contrast
Step Action Display
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status
line), switch to local control by pressing . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and
then returns to the Output mode.
Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you can
allow the reference modification in remote control.
3. • To increase the highlighted reference value shown in
the top right corner of the display, press . The
value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive
permanent memory and restored automatically after
power switch-off.
• To decrease the value, press .
Step Action Display
2. • To increase the contrast, press keys and
simultaneously.
• To decrease the contrast, press keys and
simultaneously.
EXIT
DIR MENU00:00
REM 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
LOC
REM
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 50.0Hz
50 0 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
EXIT
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
MENU
MENU
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.

86 Control panels
Parameters mode
In the Parameters mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
How to select a parameter and change its value
Step Action Display
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the
Output mode, otherwise by pressing repeatedly until
you get to the Main menu.
2. Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS
on the menu with keys and , and pressing
.
3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys
and .
Press .
4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and
. The current value of the parameter is shown
below the selected parameter.
Press .
5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys
and .
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster.
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed
value with the default value.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR GROUPS 01
99 START-UP
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR GROUPS 99
SEL
9901 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
9902 APPLIC MACRO
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC PARAMETERS
9901 LANGUAGE
9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC PARAMETERS
EDIT
9902 APPLIC MACRO
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[1]
ABB STANDARD
9902 APPLIC MACRO
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[2]
3-WIRE

Control panels 87
How to select the monitored signals
6. • To save the new value, press .
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press
.
Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output
mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL
DISPLAY parameters. See page 86 for detailed
instructions on changing parameter values.
By default, the display shows three signals:
Signal 1: 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT
Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE
To change the default signals, select up to three signals
from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown.
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01
OPERATING DATA (= number of the parameter without
the leading zero), eg 105 means parameter 0105
TORQUE. Value 0 means that no signal is displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3
(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM).
2. Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a
decimal number or a bar graph. For decimal numbers,
you can specify the decimal point location, or use the
decimal point location and unit of the source signal
(setting (9 [DIRECT]). For details, see parameter 3404.
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has
no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405.
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.
Step Action Display
SAVE
CANCEL
9901 LANGUAGE
9902 APPLIC MACRO
3-WIRE
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC PARAMETERS
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[103]
OUTPUT FREQ
3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[104]
CURRENT
3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[105]
TORQUE
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[9]
DIRECT
3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[3]
Hz

88 Control panels
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the
minimum and maximum display values. This has no
effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT).
For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407.
OUTPUT1 MAX
OUTPUT2 MAX
OUTPUT3 MAX.
Step Action Display
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
0.0 Hz
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
500.0 Hz

Control panels 89
Assistants mode
When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up Assistant guides you through the
setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up Assistant is divided into assistants, each
of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set, for example
Motor Set-up or PID Control. The Start-up Assistant activates the assistants one after
the other. You may also use the assistants independently. For more information on
the tasks of the assistants, see section Start-up Assistant on page 111.
In the Assistants mode, you can:
• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters
How to use an assistant
The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through
assistants. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used as an example.
Step Action Display
2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on
the menu keys and , and pressing .
3. Select the assistant keys and , and press
.
If you select any other assistant than the Start-up
Assistant, it guides you through the task of specification
of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5. below.
After that you can select another assistant on the
Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode. The Motor
Set-up Assistant is used here as an example.
If you select the Start-up Assistant, it activates the first
assistant, which guides you through the task of
specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4.
and 5. below. The Start-up Assistant then asks if you
want to continue with the next assistant or skip it – select
the appropriate answer with keys and , and
press . If you choose to skip, the Start-up Assistant
asks the same question about the next assistant, and so
on.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
Start-up assistant
Motor Set-up
Application
Speed control EXT1
Speed control EXT2
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC ASSISTANTS 1
SEL
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
200 V
SEL
Do you want to
continue with
application setup?
EXIT OK00:00
LOC CHOICE
Continue
Skip

90 Control panels
4. • To specify a new value, press keys and .
• To ask for information on the requested parameter,
press key . Scroll the help text with keys and
. Close the help by pressing .
5. • To accept the new value and continue to the setting of
the next parameter, press .
• To stop the assistant, press .
Step Action Display
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
240 V
?
EXIT
Set as given on the
motor nameplate.
Voltage value must
correspond to motor
D/Y connection.
EXIT 00:00
LOC HELP
SAVE
EXIT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
1.2 A

Control panels 91
Changed Parameters mode
In the Changed Parameters mode, you can:
• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default
values
• change these parameters
How to view and edit changed parameters
Step Action Display
2. Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting
CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys and ,
and pressing .
3. Select the changed parameter on the list with keys
and . The value of the selected parameter is shown
below it. Press to modify the value.
4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys
and .
5. • To accept the new value, press . If the new value
is the default value, the parameter is removed from the
list of changed parameters.
.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
1202 CONST SPEED 1
10.0 Hz
1203 CONST SPEED 2
1204 CONST SPEED 3
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC CHANGED PAR
EDIT 1202 CONST SPEED 1
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
10.0 Hz
1202 CONST SPEED 1
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
15.0 Hz
SAVE
CANCEL
1202 CONST SPEED 1
15.0 Hz
1203 CONST SPEED 2
1204 CONST SPEED 3
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC CHANGED PAR

92 Control panels
Fault Logger mode
In the Fault Logger mode, you can:
• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three
latest faults are kept in the memory)
• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the
most recent fault is kept in the memory)
• read the help text for the fault
How to view faults
Step Action Display
2. Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT
LOGGER on the menu with keys and , and
pressing . The display shows the fault log starting
with the latest fault.
The number on the row is the fault code according to
which the causes and corrective actions are listed in
chapter Fault tracing on page 287.
3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys and
, and press .
4. To show the help text, press . Scroll the help text with
keys and .
After reading the help, press to return to the
previous display.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
10: PANEL LOSS
19.03.05 13:04:57
6: DC UNDERVOLT
6: AI1 LOSS
EXIT DETAIL00:00
LOC FAULT LOG
DETAIL
FAULT
10
FAULT TIME 1
13:04:57
FAULT TIME 2
EXIT DIAG00:00
LOC PANEL LOSS
DIAG
OK
Check: comm lines
and connections,
parameter 3002,
parameters in groups
10 and 11.
EXIT OK00:00
LOC DIAGNOSTICS

Control panels 93
Time and Date mode
In the Time and Date mode, you can:
• show or hide the clock
• change date and time display formats
• set the date and time
• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock
when the panel is not powered by the drive.
How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time
and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes
Step Action Display
2. Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME &
DATE on the menu with keys and , and
pressing .
3. • To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBLILITY
on the menu, press , select Show clock (Hide
clock) and press , or, if you want to return to the
previous display without making changes, press .
• To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on
the menu, press and select a suitable format.
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
• To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on
the menu, press and select a suitable format.
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
CLOCK VISIBILITY
TIME FORMAT
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC TIME & DATE 1
SEL
SEL
EXIT
Show clock
Hide clock
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC CLOCK VISIB 1
SEL
OK CANCEL
dd.mm.yy
mm/dd/yy
dd.mm.yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
CANCEL OK00:00
LOC DATE FORMAT 1
SEL
OK CANCEL
24-hour
12-hour
CANCEL SEL00:00
LOC TIME FORMAT 1

94 Control panels
• To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and
press . Specify the hours with keys and
, and press .Then specify the minutes. Press
to save or to cancel your changes.
• To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and
press . Specify the first part of the date (day or
month depending on the selected date format) with
keys and , and press . Repeat for the
second part. After specifying the year, press . To
cancel your changes, press .
• To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions
according to the daylight saving changes, select
DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press .
Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning
and end dates of the period during which daylight
saving time is used in each country or area whose
daylight saving changes you can select to be followed.
• To disable automatic clock transitions according to
the daylight saving changes, select Off and press
.
• To enable automatic clock transitions, select the
country or area whose daylight saving changes are
followed and press .
• To return to the previous display without making
changes, press .
Step Action Display
SEL
OK
OK CANCEL
CANCEL OK00:00
LOC SET TIME
15:41
SEL
OK
OK
CANCEL
CANCEL OK00:00
LOC SET DATE
19.03.05
SEL
?
SEL
SEL
EXIT
Off
EU
US
Australia1:NSW,Vict..
Australia2:Tasmania..
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1
EU:
On: Mar last Sunday
Off: Oct last Sunday
US:
EXIT 00:00
LOC HELP

Control panels 95
Parameter Backup mode
The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another
or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive
parameters, including up to two user sets, to the Assistant Control Panel. The full set,
partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from the
control panel to another drive or the same drive.
The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery.
In the Parameter Backup mode, you can:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL).
This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by
the user) parameters.
• View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD
TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes eg the type and rating of the drive
where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when you are
going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to
ensure that the drives match.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable
motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer
parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.
• Copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive
(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal
motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 53
EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User macros on page 110)
and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL.
• Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.
• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

96 Control panels
How to upload and download parameters
For the upload and download functions available, see above.
Step Action Display
2. Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP
.
3. • To copy all parameters (including user sets and
internal parameters) from the drive to the control
panel, select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup
menu with keys and , and press .
During the transfer, the display shows the transfer
status as a percentage of completion. Press if you
want to stop the operation.
After the upload is completed, the display shows a
message about the completion. Press to return to
the Par Backup menu.
• To perform downloads, select the appropriate
operation (here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an
example) on the Par Backup menu with keys
and , and press . The display shows the
transfer status as a percentage of completion. Press
if you want to stop the operation.
After the download is completed, the display shows a
message about the completion. Press to return to
the Par Backup menu.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
UPLOAD TO PANEL
BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD APPLICATION
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR BACKUP 1
SEL
ABORT
Copying parameters
50%
ABORT 00:00
LOC PAR BACKUP
OK
Parameter upload
successful
OK 00:00
LOC MESSAGE
SEL
ABORT
Downloading
parameters (full
set)
50%
ABORT 00:00
LOC PAR BACKUP
OK
Parameter download
successfully
completed.
OK 00:00
LOC MESSAGE

Control panels 97
How to view information about the backup
Step Action Display
2. Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP
.
3. Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with
keys and , and press . The display
shows the following information about the drive where
the backup was made:
DRIVE TYPE: type of the drive
DRIVE RATING: rating of the drive in format XXXYZ,
where
XXX: Nominal current rating. If
present, an “A” indicates a decimal
point, eg 9A7 means 9.7 A.
Y: 2 = 200 V
4 = 400 V
Z: i = European loading package
n = US loading package
FIRMWARE: firmware version of the drive.
You can scroll the information with keys and .
4. Press to return to the Par Backup menu.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
UPLOAD TO PANEL
BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR BACKUP 1
SEL
DRIVE TYPE
ACS310
3304 DRIVE RATING
9A74i
3301 FIRMWARE
EXIT 00:00
LOC BACKUP INFO
ACS310
3304 DRIVE RATING
9A74i
3301 FIRMWARE
241A hex
EXIT 00:00
LOC BACKUP INFO
EXIT
UPLOAD TO PANEL
BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC PAR BACKUP 1

98 Control panels
I/O Settings mode
In the I/O Settings mode, you can:
• check the parameter settings related to any I/O terminal
• edit the parameter setting. For example, if “1103: REF1” is listed under Ain1
(Analog input 1), that is, parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1, you can
change its value to eg AI2. You cannot, however, set the value of parameter 1106
REF2 SELECT to AI1.
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals
Step Action Display
2. Go the I/O Settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS on
the menu with keys and , and pressing .
3. Select the I/O group, eg DIGITAL INPUTS, with keys
and , and press . After a brief pause, the
display shows the current settings for the selection.
4. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with
keys and , and press .
5. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and
.
6. • To save the new value, press .
.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
LOC MAIN MENU 1
ENTER
DIGITAL INPUTS (DI)
ANALOG INPUTS (AI)
RELAY OUTPUTS (ROUT)
ANALOG OUTPUTS (AOUT)
PANEL
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC I/O SETTINGS 1
SEL
-DI1-
1001:START/STOP (E1)
-DI2-
-DI3-
EXIT 00:00
LOC I/O SETTINGS 1
EDIT
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[1]
DI,1
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
[2]
DI2
SAVE
CANCEL
-DI1-
1001:START/STOP (E1)
-DI2-
1001:DIR (E1)
-DI3-
EXIT 00:00
LOC I/O SETTINGS 1

Application macros 99
10
Application macros
The chapter describes the application macros. For each macro, there is a wiring
diagram showing the default control connections (digital and analog I/O). The chapter
also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited for the
purpose - with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO, makes the essential changes and
saves the result as a user macro.
The ACS310 has eight standard macros and two user macros. The table below
contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Suitable applications
ABB Standard Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant
speeds are used. Start/stop is controlled with one digital input (level start
and stop). It is possible to switch between two acceleration and
deceleration times.
3-wire Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant
speeds are used. The drive is started and stopped with push buttons.
Alternate Speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used. Start, stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs
(combination of the input states determines the operation).
Motor
Potentiometer
Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used. The
speed is controlled by two digital inputs (increase / decrease / keep
unchanged).
Hand/Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is
needed. Some control signal terminals are reserved to one device, the
rest for the other. One digital input selects between the terminals (devices)
in use.

100 Application macros
PID Control Process control applications, for example different closed loop control
systems such as pressure control, level control and flow control. It is
possible to switch between process and speed control: Some control
signal terminals are reserved for process control, others for speed control.
One digital input selects between process and speed control.
PFC Control Pump alternation applications, for example booster stations in buildings.
The pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the
pump according to the signal received from the pressure transducer and
adding auxiliary pumps directly on-line when needed.
SPFC Control Soft PFC Control for pump alternation applications where lower pressure
peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started.
User The user can save the customized standard macro, ie the parameter
settings including group 99 START-UP DATA into the permanent memory,
and recall the data at a later time.
For example, two user macros can be used when switching between two
different motors is required.
Macro Suitable applications

Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros
The following table gives the summary of the default I/O connections of all application
macros.
Input/
output
Macro
ABB
Standard
3-wire Alternate Motor
Potentiom.
Hand/Auto PID
Control
PFC
Control
SPFC
Control
AI1
(0…10 V)
Freq. ref. Speed ref. Speed ref. - Speed ref.
(Hand)
Speed ref.
(Hand) /
Proc. ref.
(PID)
Ext. ref. 1
(Hand) /
Ext. ref. 2
(PID/PFC)
AI2
(0…20 mA)
- - - - Speed ref.
(Auto)
Process
value
Process
value
AO Output
freq.
Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Output
freq.
DI1 Stop/Start Start
(pulse)
Start (fwd) Stop/Start Stop/Start
(Hand)
Stop/Start
(Hand)
Stop/Start
(Hand)
DI2 Fwd/Rev Stop
(pulse)
Start (rev) Fwd/Rev Fwd/Rev
(Hand)
Hand/PID Hand/
PID,PFC
DI3 Const.
speed
input 1
Fwd/Rev Const.
speed
input 1
Speed ref.
up
Hand/Auto Const.
speed 1
Interlock
DI4 Const.
speed
input 2
Const.
speed
input 1
Const.
speed
input 2
Speed ref.
down
Fwd/Rev
(Auto)
Run
enable
Interlock
DI5 Ramp pair
selection
Const.
speed
input 2
Ramp pair
selection
Const.
speed 1
Stop/Start
(Auto)
Stop/Start
(PID)
Stop/Start
(PID/PFC)
RO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) PFC
DO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) PFC
Control:
Fault (-1)
SPFC
Control:
PFC

ABB Standard macro
This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose I/O configuration with three
constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values given in section All
parameters on page 161.
If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section I/O
terminals on page 49.
Default I/O connections
X1A
2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
1…10 kohm
3)
1) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS:
2) 0 = ramp times according to parameters
2202 and 2203.
2205 and 2206.
3)
Tightening torque = 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf in.
1 0 Speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)

3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It
provides three constant speeds. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter
9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 (3-WIRE).
For the parameter default values, see section Default values with different macros on
page 151. If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section
I/O terminals on page 49.
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start and
stop buttons are disabled.
X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference: 0…10 V
7 AO Motor speed value: 0…20 mA
12 DI1 Start (pulse )
13 DI2 Stop (pulse )
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
1…10 kohm
2)
1)
See parameter group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS:
2)
1 0 Speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)

Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals
used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable the macro, set the
value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 (ALTERNATE).
X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference: 0…10 V
12 DI1 Start forward: If DI1 = DI2, the drive stops.
13 DI2 Start reverse
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
1…10 kohm
3)
1) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS:
2) 0 = ramp times according to parameters
2202 and 2203.
2205 and 2206.
3)
1 0 Speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)

Motor Potentiometer macro
This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the
motor using only digital signals. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902
APPLIC MACRO to 4 (MOTOR POT).
X1A
14 DI3 Speed reference up 1)
15 DI4 Speed reference down 1)
16 DI5 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
2)
1) If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the
speed reference is unchanged.
The existing speed reference is stored
during stop and power down.
2) 360 degree grounding under a clamp.

Hand/Auto macro
This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is
needed. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to
5 (HAND/AUTO).
Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 (OFF).
X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference (Hand): 0…10 V
5 AI2 Motor speed reference (Auto): 0…20 mA 2)
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Hand)
14 DI3 Hand (0) / Auto (1) control selection
15 DI4 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Auto)
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Auto)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
1…10 kohm
1)
1)
360 degree grounding under a clamp. 2)
The signal source must be powered
externally. See the manufacturer’s
instructions. An example of a connection
using a two-wire sensor is given on page 51.

PID Control macro
This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as
pressure control, flow control, etc. Control can also be switched to speed control
using a digital input. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO to 6 (PID CONTROL).
X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed ref. (Hand) / Process ref. (PID): 0…10 V 1)
5 AI2 Process actual value: 4…20 mA 3)
13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID (1) control selection)
14 DI3 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202
15 DI4 Run enable
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
max. 500 ohm
1…10 kohm
2)
1)
Hand: 0…10 V -> speed reference.
PID: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint.
2)
3)

PFC Control macro
This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications.
To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 7 (PFC
CONTROL).
X1A
2 AI1 Ext. ref. 1 (Hand) / Ext. ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V 1)
13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID/PFC (1) control selection
14 DI3 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
15 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID/PFC)
X1B
PFC18 RONC
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1…10 kohm
2)
1)
Hand: 0…10 V -> 0…50 Hz.
PID/PFC: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint.
2)
3)

SPFC Control macro
This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (SPFC) applications
with a soft start function. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902
APPLIC MACRO to 15 (SPFC CONTROL).
X1A
2 AI1 Ext. ref. 1 (Hand) / Ext. ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V 1)
13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID/PFC (1) control selection
14 DI3 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
15 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID/PFC)
X1B
PFC18 RONC
19 RONO
PFC21 DOOUT
22 DOGND
1…10 kohm
2)
4)
Hand: 0…10 V -> 0…50 Hz.
PID/PFC: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint.
5)
6)

User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings, including
group 99 START-UP DATA, into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later
time. The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local
control. The remote control setting is saved into the user macro, but the local control
setting is not.
The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1. The procedure for the
User macro 2 is identical, only the parameter 9902 values are different.
To create User macro 1:
• Adjust the parameters.
• Save the parameter settings to the permanent memory by changing parameter
9902 to -1 (USER S1 SAVE).
• Press (Assistant Control Panel) or (Basic Control Panel).
To recall User macro 1:
• Change parameter 9902 to 0 (USER S1 LOAD).
• Press (Assistant Control Panel) or (Basic Control Panel) to load.
The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter 1605).
Note: User macro load restores the parameter settings, including group 99 START-
UP DATA. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.
Hint: The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having
to adjust the motor parameters every time the motor is changed. The user needs only
to adjust the settings once for each motor and then to save the data as two user
macros. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user macro needs to be
loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.
SAVE ENTER
MENU
SAVE ENTER
MENU

Program features 111
11
Program features
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages.
Start-up Assistant
Introduction
The Start-up Assistant (requires the Assistant Control Panel) guides the user through
the start-up procedure, helping to enter the requested data (parameter values) to the
drive. The Start-up Assistant also checks that the entered values are valid, ie within
the allowed range.
The Start-up Assistant calls other assistants, each of which guides the user through
the task of specifying a related parameter set. At the first start, the drive suggests
entering the first task, Language Select, automatically. The user may activate the
tasks either one after the other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently.
The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using
the assistant at all.
See section Assistants mode on page 89 on how to start the Start-up Assistant or
other assistants.

112 Program features
Default order of the tasks
Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests. The
default tasks are shown in the table below.
Application selection Default tasks
ABB STANDARD Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,
Speed Control EXT1, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop Control,
Timed Functions, Protections, Output Signals
3-WIRE Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,
ALTERNATE Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,
MOTOR POT Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,
HAND/AUTO Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,
PID CONTROL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, PID
Control, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop Control, Timed Functions,
Protections, Output Signals
PFC CONTROL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,
SPFC CONTROL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules,

List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters
Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests.
Name Description Set parameters
Language Select Selecting the language 9901
Motor Set-up Setting the motor data 9905…9909
Application Selecting the application macro 9902, parameters
associated to the macro
Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP
MEAS, group 52 PANEL
COMM
9802
Speed Control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed (output
frequency) reference
1103
(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1
limits, scale, inversion)
(1301…1303, 3001)
Setting the reference limits 1104, 1105
Setting the frequency limits 2007, 2008
Setting the acceleration and deceleration
times
2202, 2203
Speed Control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed (output
frequency) reference
1106
(1301…1303, 3001)
PID Control Selecting the source for the process
reference
1106
(1301…1303, 3001)
Setting the speed (reference) limits 2007, 2008
Setting the source and limits for the
process actual value
4016, 4018, 4019
Start/Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop
signals of the two external control
locations, EXT1 and EXT2
1001, 1002
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102
Defining the direction control 1003
Defining the start and stop modes 2101…2103
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601
Protections Setting the current limits 2003
Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through
relay output RO
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
Selecting the signals indicated through
analog output AO
Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling
and inversion
Group 15 ANALOG
OUTPUTS

Timed Functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS
Selecting the timed start/stop control for
external control locations EXT1 and EXT2
1001, 1002
Selecting timed EXT1/EXT2 control 1102
Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201
Selecting timed function status indicated
through relay output RO
1401
Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1/2
control
4027
Name Description Set parameters

Contents of the assistant displays
There are two types of displays in the Start-up Assistant: Main displays and the
information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information. The
assistant steps through the main displays. The information displays contain help texts
for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical example of both and
explanations of the contents.
Local control vs. external control
The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from
the control panel or through digital and analog inputs. Embedded fieldbus enables
control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow Light PC tool
can also control the drive.
Main display Information display
1
2
1 Parameter Help text …
2 Feed-in field … help text continued
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT SAVE00:00
LOC PAR EDIT
220 V
Set exactly as given
on the motor
nameplate
If connected to
multiple motors
EXIT 00:00
LOC HELP
Standard I/O
External controlDriveLocal control
Control panel
or
PC tool
Embedded fieldbus
(Modbus RTU*)
RS-232
RS-485
* With SREA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module it is possible to use Modbus TCP/IP with the
Ethernet. For more information, see SREA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module User’s Manual
(3AUA0000042896 [English]).

Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. LOC indicates local control on the panel display.
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local mode.
External control
When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard
I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs) and/or the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is
also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control.
External control is indicated with REM on the panel display.
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function
operates on a 2 ms time level.
Settings
Panel key Additional information
LOC/REM Selection between local and external control
Parameter
1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2
1001/1002 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1/EXT2
1103/1106 Reference source for EXT1/EXT2
Assistant panel Basic panel
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
LOC
Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.
Assistant panel Basic panel
DIR MENU00:00
REM 49.1Hz
49 1 Hz.
0 5 A.
10 7 %.
REM Hz
OUTPUT FWD
491.

Diagnostics
Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and
direction for external control location EXT1.
Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed
reference of external control location EXT1.
Actual signals Additional information
0111/0112 EXT1/EXT2 reference
DI1
DI5
DI1
DI5
1001
Embedded fieldbus
Control panel
Timed function
EXT1
Start/stop/
direction
COMM
KEYPAD
TIMED FUNC 1…4
Select
Fieldbus selection
See chapter
Fieldbus control with
embedded fieldbus
on page 265.
1103
Embedded fieldbus
Frequency input
Control panel
EXT1
Reference
REF1
(Hz/rpm)
COMM
FREQ INPUT
KEYPAD
Select
AI1
AI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
AI1, AI2, DI3, DI4, DI5
Fieldbus selection
See chapter
embedded fieldbus
on page 265.

Reference types and processing
The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog
input and control panel signals.
• The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input
increases the speed, the other decreases it.
• The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using
mathematical functions: Addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.
• The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received
through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions:
Addition and multiplication.
• The drive reference can be given with frequency input.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum
speed limits.
Settings
Diagnostics
Parameter Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source, type and scaling
Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration/deceleration ramps
Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision
Actual signal Additional information
0111/0112 REF1/REF2 reference
Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference
processing chain

Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external reference is corrected depending on the
measured value of a secondary application variable. The block diagram below
illustrates the function.
Settings
1102 REF1/2 selection
4230 …4232 Trimming function settings
4201 …4229 PID control settings
Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits
REF’0
max. freq
PID2 ref
4232 CORRECTION SRC
4231 TRIM SCALE
1105 REF1 MAX /
Mul.
Add
PID2
4230
Select
DIRECT (2)
PROPOR. (1)
NOT SEL (0)
REF1 (Hz/rpm) /
REF2 (%)1)
Mul.
Switch 2)
Switch
PID2 act
PID2
REF1
(Hz/rpm) /
REF2 (%)1)
1108 REF 2 MAX 2)
output
REF1 (Hz/rpm) / REF2 (%) = The drive reference before trimming
REF’ = The drive reference after trimming
max. freq = par. 2008 (or 2007 if the absolute value is greater)
PID2 ref = par. 4210
PID2 act = par. 4214…4221
1)
REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active. See parameter 1102.
2)
When par. 4232 = PID2REF, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter
1105 when REF1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active.
When par. 4232 = PID2 OUTPUT, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter
2008 value.

Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user
• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it.
• tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Programmable analog inputs
The drive has two programmable analog voltage/current inputs. The inputs can be
inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The update
cycle for the analog input is 8 ms (12 ms cycle once per second). The cycle time is
shorter when information is transferred to the application program (8 ms -> 2 ms).
Settings
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT AI as reference source
Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input processing
3001, 3021, 3022, 3107 AI loss supervision
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AI in motor temperature measurement
Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1
…42 EXT / TRIM PID
AI as PID process control reference or actual value
source
Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION AI as pump protection measurement source
Add
Tension
measurement
Tension
setpoint
Trimmed output
frequency referencePID
Speed controlled conveyor line
Simplified block diagram
Tension measurement
Drive rollers (pull)
Output frequency
reference

Diagnostics
Programmable analog output
One programmable current output (0…20 mA) is available. Analog output signal can
be inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The
analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, output frequency, output
current, motor torque, motor power, etc. The update cycle for the analog output is
2 ms.
It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication
link.
Settings
Diagnostics
0120, 0121 Analog input values
1401 AI1/A2 signal loss
Alarm
AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below AI1/AI2 FAULT LIMIT
(3021/3022)
Fault
AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit AI1/AI2 FAULT LIMIT
(3021/3022)
PAR AI SCALE Incorrect AI signal scaling (1302 < 1301 or 1305 <
1304)
Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement
0124 AO value
Fault
PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling (1503 < 1502)

Programmable digital inputs
The drive has five programmable digital inputs. The update time for the digital inputs
is 2 ms.
It is possible to delay the state change of digital inputs with delays defined in group
18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT. This enables very simple program sequences by connecting
several functions with the same physical wire, eg to remove branches and leaves
from a pipe by running the fan in reverse before normal operation.
One digital input (DI5) can be programmed as a frequency input. See section
Frequency input on page 123.
Settings
Group 10 START/STOP/DIR DI as start, stop, direction
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT DI in reference selection, or reference source
Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI in constant speed selection
Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run Enable, fault reset or user macro
change signal
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Delays in DI state changes
2109 DI as external emergency stop command source
2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection
signal
2209 DI as zero ramp force signal
3003 DI as external fault source
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS DI in motor temperature measurement
3601 DI as timed function enable signal source
3622 DI as booster activation signal source
4010/4110/4210 DI as PID controller reference signal source
4022/4122 DI as sleep function activation signal in PID1
4027 DI as PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection signal source
4034/4035 DI as PID reference/output freezing source
4039/4139 DI as PID internal setpoint selection source
4228 DI as external PID2 function activation signal source
4406/4414 DI as connection signal source for pump inlet/outlet
pressure switch
4421 DI as pipe fill enable source
4601 DI as pump clean trigger source
6403 DI as load analyzer logger reset source
8120 DI as PFC interlock source

Diagnostics
Programmable relay output
The drive has one programmable relay output. It is possible to add three additional
relay outputs with the optional Relay Output Extension Module MREL-0. For more
information, see MREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module User's Manual
(3AUA0000035974 [English]).
With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through
the relay output: Ready, running, fault, alarm, etc. The update time for the relay
output is 2 ms.
A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link.
Settings
Diagnostics
Frequency input
Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input. Frequency input
(0…16000 Hz) can be used as external reference signal source. The update time for
the frequency input is 50 ms. Update time is shorter when information is transferred
to the application program (50 ms -> 2 ms).
Settings
0160 DI status
0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times
0134 RO Control Word through fieldbus control
0162 RO 1 status
0173 RO 2…4 status. With option MREL-01 only.
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and
filtering
1103/1106 External reference REF1/2 through frequency input
4010, 4110, 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source

Diagnostics
Transistor output
The drive has one programmable transistor output. The output can be used either as
digital output or frequency output (0…16000 Hz). The update time for the
transistor/frequency output is 2 ms.
Settings
Diagnostics
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
• Motor speed and torque
• Intermediate circuit DC voltage
• Active control location (LOCAL, EXT1 or EXT2)
• Reference values
• Drive temperature
• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
• Digital I/O and analog I/O status
• PID controller actual values.
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display
(one signal on the basic panel display). It is also possible to read the values through
the serial communication link or through the analog outputs.
Settings
0161 Frequency input value
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Transistor output settings
0163 Transistor output status
0164 Transistor output frequency
1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO
1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output
Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision

Diagnostics
Power loss ride-through
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Settings
Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL
Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the
control panel
Group 01 OPERATING DATA … 04
FAULT HISTORY
Lists of actual signals
130
260
390
520
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
t (s)
UDC
fout
TM
UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = Output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops
to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is
switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is
operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Uinput power
20
40
60
80
40
80
120
160
TM
(N·m)
fout
(Hz)
UDC
(Vdc)
0 0 0

DC Magnetizing
When DC Magnetizing is activated, the drive automatically magnetizes the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up to
180% of the motor nominal torque. By adjusting the paramagnetism time, it is
possible to synchronize the motor start. The Automatic Start feature and DC
Magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME
Maintenance trigger
A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when
eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point.
Settings
Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG
Acceleration and deceleration ramps
Two user-selectable acceleration and
deceleration ramps are available. It is possible to
adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and
the ramp shape. Switching between the two
ramps can be controlled via a digital input or
fieldbus.
The available ramp shape alternatives are
Linear and S-curve.
Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or
slow acceleration/deceleration.
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a
smooth transition is required when changing the speed.
Settings
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL
Linear
S-curve
Motor speed
t (s)
2

Critical Speeds
A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds (drive output frequencies) or speed bands (output frequency
bands) because of eg mechanical resonance problems. The user can define three
critical frequencies or frequency bands.
Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
Constant speeds
It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected
with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
Constant speed selections are ignored if
• PID reference is being followed, or
• drive is in local control mode.
This function operates on a 2 ms time level.
Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
Constant speed 7 (1208 CONST SPEED 7) is also used for fault functions. See
parameter group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS.

Custom U/f ratio
The user can define a U/f curve (output voltage as a function of frequency). This
custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U/f ratio
are not sufficient (eg when motor break-away torque needs to be boosted).
Note: The voltage and the frequency points of the U/f curve must fulfill the following
requirements:
2610 < 2612 < 2614 < 2616 < 2618 and
2611 < 2613 < 2615 < 2617 < 9907
WARNING! High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or
motor damage (overheating).
Settings
Diagnostics
2605 Custom U/f ratio activation
2610…2618 Custom U/f ratio settings
Fault Additional information
PAR CUSTOM U/F Incorrect U/f ratio
f (Hz)
par. 2603
par. 2611 par. 2613 par. 2615 par. 2617 par. 9907
par. 2610
par. 2612
par. 2614
par. 2616
par. 2618
Custom U/f ratioVoltage (V)

IR compensation
When IR compensation is activated, the drive
gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low
speeds. IR compensation is useful in
applications that require high breakaway torque.
Settings
Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT
Programmable protection functions
AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the
set minimum limit.
Settings
Parameters 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT
Panel Loss
Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as
control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR
External Fault
External Faults (1 and 2) can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source
for an external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2
Stall Protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition
(alarm indication / fault indication & drive stop / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters 3010…3012
Motor voltage
f (Hz)
No compensation
IR compensation

Motor Thermal Protection
The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal
Protection function.
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1. The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 °C when power is applied to the
drive.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically
calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve (see the figures
below). The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature
exceeds 30 °C.
Settings
Parameters 3005…3009
Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See
section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 139.
Earth Fault Protection
The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable. The
protection is active only during start.
An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection.
Settings
Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT
Incorrect wiring
Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected.
}
Motor
load
Temp.
rise
100%
63%
Motor thermal time constant
t
100 =
127%
150
50
P 3007
P 3008
f
Output current relative (%) to
motor nom. current
P 3009
100%
Break point
Motor load curve
Zero speed load
t

Settings
Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT
Preprogrammed faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325% of the drive nominal current.
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V (for 200 V drives) and 840 V (for 400 V drives).
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive. See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL.
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the IGBT temperature. There are two supervision limits: Alarm
limit and fault trip limit.
Short circuit
If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given.
Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.
Supply phase loss
If the drive detects supply phase loss (excessive DC voltage ripple), the drive is
stopped and a fault indication is given.
Operation limits
The drive has adjustable limits for output frequency, current (maximum) and DC
voltage.
Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS

Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit.
If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited.
Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware.
For specific values, see chapter Technical data on page 307.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage,
external and “analog input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic Resets must be
activated by the user.
Settings
Diagnostics
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the
user-defined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc. The supervision
status can be indicated through relay or digital output.
The supervision function outputs can be used for triggering some drive functionality
(start/stop, sleep, pump cleaning).
The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level.
Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION
Diagnostics
31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings
Alarm Additional information
AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm
1001/1002 EXT1/EXT2 start/stop according to supervision functions
1401 Supervision status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Supervision status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
1805 Supervision status through DO
4022/4122 Sleep start according to supervision functions
4601 Pump clean trigger according to supervision functions

Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
Settings
Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE
PID control
There are two built-in PID controllers in the drive:
• Process PID (PID1) and
• External/Trim PID (PID2).
The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based
on process variables such as pressure, flow or temperature.
When the PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the
drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also
brought back to the drive. The drive compares the reference and the actual values,
and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process
quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference).
The control operates on a 2 ms time level.
Process controller PID1
PID1 has two separate sets of parameters (40 PROCESS PID SET 1, 41 PROCESS
PID SET 2). Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter.
In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive, only
parameter set 1 is needed. Two different parameter sets (1 and 2) are used eg when
the load of the motor changes considerably in time.
External/Trim controller PID2
PID2 (42 EXT / TRIM PID) can be used in two different ways:
• External controller: Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, the user
can connect PID2 output via drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control
a field instrument like a damper or a valve.
• Trim controller: PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive.
See section Reference trimming on page 119.

Block diagrams
The figure below shows an application example: The controller adjusts the speed of a
pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure
reference.
ref
k
ti
td
i
dFiltT
errVInv
oh1
ol1
Frequency
reference
%ref = 4010
...
.
..
A C T P A R F U N C D R I V E
E N T E R
L O C
R E M
R E S E T R E F
A C S 6 0 0
0 . . . 1 0 b a r
4 . . . 2 0 m A
3
3
2
Drive
PID control block diagramExample:
Pressure boost pump
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
PIDmin
PIDmax
4014
4021
AI1
AI2
IMOT
%ref
Actual values
PID

The following figure presents the speed/scalar control block diagram for process
controller PID1.
PIDACT
PID1Out
1106
n
1102
switch
EXT1/EXT2
Controlpanel
switch
LOC/REM
1101
switch
Localref
Panelref1
Panelref2
n
value
n
1104
Limiter
PIDACT
value
Panelref2
500%
Limiter
-500%
PID1Out
Averagespeed
Constspeed7
Frequency
n
AI
Current
Torque
Power
COMMACT
n
AI
Current
Torque
Power
COMMACT
4014...4021/
PIDact
selection
1103
EXT1ref
select
1106
EXT2ref
select
Panelref1
AI
...
4010/4110*
PID1ref
select
4014...4021/
PIDact
selection
4012,4013/
Limiter
Group12
Constant
speed
Group12
Constant
speed
Switch
Group
PID1
controller
1106
Switch
1107
Limiter
Group30
Alarm
speed
Group
PID1
controller
LOC
REMref
4112,4113*
40/41*
40/41*
4114...4121*
4141...4121*
*Parameter4027selectsbetweenPIDparameterset1and2,iegroup40and41.
Panelref2
AI
...
Panelref2
AI
...
FREQINPUT
FREQINPUT
FREQINPUT

Settings
Diagnostics
1101 Local control mode reference type selection
1102 EXT1/2 selection
1106 PID1 activation
1107 REF2 minimum limit
1501 PID2 output (external controller) connection to AO
9902 PID control macro selection
Group 40 PROCESS PID SET
1…41 PROCESS PID SET 2
PID1 settings
Group 42 EXT / TRIM PID PID2 settings
0126/0127 PID 1/2 output value
0128/0129 PID 1/2 setpoint value
0130/0131 PID 1/2 feedback value
0132/0133 PID 1/2 deviation

Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control
The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level.
The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The sleep
function can be put into use only when the PID control is active.
1) 1 = Activate sleeping
0 = Deactivate sleeping
4022
SelectCompare
1<2
Or
<1
4024
Delay
t
1
24023
NOT SEL
DI1
And
&%refActive
PIDCtrlActive
modulating
Set/Reset
S
R
S/RNOT SEL
INTERNAL
DI1
4026
Delay
t
Or
<1
StartRq
5320 (B1)
5320 (B2) 1)
INTERNAL
4022
Select
Mot. speed: Actual speed of the motor
%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See parameter 1102.
PIDCtrlActive: 9902 is PID CTRL.
modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Compare
1>2
1
2
Output
freq.
0132
4025
4030
Delay
t
Or
<1
Set/Reset
S
R
S/R
2)
2) 1 = Activate sleep boost
0 = Deactivate sleep boost

Example
The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function.
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump (when parameter 4022 is set
to INTERNAL): The water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the PID
process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the
pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not
stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the
unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep
mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls
under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has passed.
Wake-up level deviation
(4025)
t < tsd
Output frequency
Selected process
actual value
Stop
tsd = Sleep delay (4024)
Sleep level
(4023)
Start
Wake-up delay
(4026)
tsd
Reference
Time
Sleep boost step (4031)
Control panel:
PID
SLEEP
Sleep boost time (4030)
Time
Time

Settings
Diagnostics
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O
This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive
I/O terminals are used as the connection interface.
Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to
analog input and output.
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature
sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and
the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm
(400/500 V AC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement
• the I/O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be
connected to other equipment
or
• the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I/O terminals.
9902 PID control activation
4022…4026, 4030, 4031,
4122…4126, 4130, 4131
Sleep function settings
1401 PID sleep function status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 PID sleep function status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
Alarm Additional information
PID SLEEP Sleep mode
T
TTT
10 nF
AI1
GND
AO
GND
AI1
GND
AO
GND
MotorMotor
One sensor Three sensors
10 nF

It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and
a thermistor relay between the +24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a
digital input. The figure below displays the connection.
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to the
digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts
and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of
8 mm (400/500 V AC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the other I/O terminals of
the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to
isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
Settings
Diagnostics
13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings
15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output settings
35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings
Other
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not
possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
Actual value Additional information
0145 Motor temperature
Alarm/Fault Additional information
MOTOR TEMP/MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp
T
Thermistor
relay
DI1…5
+24 V DC
Motor
Par. 3501 = THERM (0) or THERM(1)

Timed functions
A variety of drive functions can be time controlled, eg start/stop and EXT1/EXT2
control. The drive offers
• four start and stop times (START TIME 1…4, STOP TIME 1…4)
• four start and stop days (START DAY 1…4, STOP DAY 1…4)
• four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1…4 together (TIMED
FUNC 1…4)
• booster time (an additional booster time connected to timed functions).
A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods:
TIME PERIOD 1
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1
TIME PERIOD 4
3614 START TIME 4
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
TIME PERIOD 3
3610 START TIME 3
3611 STOP TIME 3
3612 START DAY 3
3613 STOP DAY 3
TIME PERIOD 2
3606 START TIME 2
3607 STOP TIME 2
3608 START DAY 2
3609 STOP DAY 2
BOOSTER
3622 BOOSTER SEL
3623 BOOSTER TIME
TIMED FUNC 1
3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC
TIMED FUNC 2
TIMED FUNC 3
TIMED FUNC 4

A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one
timed function at a time.
Example
Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8:00 to 15:30 (8 a.m to 3:30 p.m) and on
Sundays from 12:00 to 15:00 (12 to 3 p.m). By pressing the extension time switch,
the air-conditioning is on for an extra hour.
Settings
Parameter Setting
3602 START TIME 1 08:00:00
3603 STOP TIME 1 15:30:00
3604 START DAY 1 MONDAY
3605 STOP DAY 1 FRIDAY
3606 START TIME 2 12:00:00
3607 STOP TIME 2 15:00:00
3608 START DAY 2 SUNDAY
3609 STOP DAY 2 SUNDAY
3623 BOOSTER TIME 01:00:00
36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Timed functions settings
1001, 1002 Timed start/stop control
1102 Timed EXT1/EXT2 selection
1201 Timed constant speed 1 activation
1209 Timed speed selection
1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2…4.
With option MREL-01 only.
1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO
4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection
4228 Timed external PID2 activation
TIMED FUNC 1
TIMED FUNC 2
1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS
1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SE
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
1209 TIME MODE SEL
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
4027 PID PARAM SET
4228 ACTIVATE

User load curve
The user can specify a load curve (motor torque as a function of frequency) for
supervision. The curve is defined by five points. Supervision can be set for the torque
dropping below the underload curve, exceeding the overload curve, or both.
A fault is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the
user-defined time limit. An alarm is generated if the torque has been out of the
allowed area for longer than the half of the user-defined time limit.
Settings
Diagnostics
Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE User load curve settings
0105 Motor torque
Alarm
USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than half of the defined
time limit
Fault
USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than the defined time
limit
PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load curve parameter setting
(3704 > 3707 or 3707 > 3710 or 3710 > 3713 or 3713 >
3716 or
3705 > 3706 or 3708 > 3709 or 3711 > 3712 or 3714 >
3715 or 3717 > 3718)
Overload area
Underload area
Allowed operating area
Motor torque (%)
Output
frequency (Hz)
Freq. 2Freq. 1 Freq. 3 Freq. 4 Freq. 5
Torque
high 1
Torque
high 2
Torque
high 3
Torque
low 1
Torque
low 2
Torque
low 3
Torque
high 4
Torque
low 4
Torque
high 5
Torque
low 5

Energy optimizer
Energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor
noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total
efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1…10% depending on load torque
and speed.
Energy saving tools calculate energy saved in kWh and MWh, energy saved in local
currency as well as reduction in CO2 emission, all compared to the situation when the
pump is connected directly to the supply.
Settings
Diagnostics
Pump cleaning
Pump cleaning sequence consists of cyclic forward and reverse “steps”. See the
figure below. The pump cleaning cycle can be activated at start-up, with a user-
defined period, with a selectable digital input or by the Supervision function (for
example triggered by the motor input current).
Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Energy saving settings
0174/0175 Energy saved in kWh/Mwh
0176/0177 Energy saved in local currency
0178 Reduction in CO2 emission
t
Forward
Reverse
Trigger
time
Forward
step
Number of steps
Reverse
step
Forward
time
Forward
time
Reverse
time
Off
time
Off
time
Off
time

Settings
Parameter group 46 PUMP CLEANING
Load analyzer
The load analyzer can be used for analyzing the customer’s process and sizing the
drive and the motor.
The peak value is logged at 2 ms level, and the distribution loggers are updated on
0.2 s (200 ms) time level. Three different values can be logged:
1. The measured current is logged continuously. The distribution as a percentage of
the maximum current is shown in ten classes.
2. One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak (maximum) value. The peak
value of the signal, peak time (time when the peak value was detected) as well
the frequency, current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown.
3. One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude distribution. The base value
(100% value) can be set by the user.
Logger 1 cannot be reset. Loggers 2 and 3 can be reset by a user-defined method.
They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed.
Settings
Diagnostics
Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER,
parameters 6401…6405
Load analyzer settings
Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER,
parameters 6406…6433
Load analyzer results

PFC and SPFC control
PFC control
Pump and Fan Control (PFC) control switches auxiliary pumps on and off as required
by capacity changes. Autochange function alternates between pumps to keep the
duty times of the pumps equal. Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of
the pumps are unavailable (eg switched off for maintenance), in which case the next
available pump is started instead.
The drive controls the motor of pump 1, varying the motor speed to control the pump
capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.
Direct line connections power the motor of pump 2 and pump 3, etc. The drive
switches pump 2 (and then pump 3, etc.) on and off as needed. These motors are
auxiliary motors.
The drive PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual value
feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that
the actual value follows the process reference.
When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor’s capacity
(user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary
pump. The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary
pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller adjusts the speed
(frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.
If demand continues to increase, PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps, using the
same process.
When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit
(user defined by a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary
pump. The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary
pump’s missing output.
An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and the
PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence.
An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)
equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically increments
the position of each motor in the rotation – the speed regulated motor becomes the
last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor, etc.
See also section PFC Control macro on page 108.
SPFC control
Soft Pump and Fan Control (SPFC) is very similar to PFC control, but it ensures that
all motors are started smoothly. When new motors need to be started due to
increasing pumping capacity need, they are powered up by the drive as follows:

When the speed regulated motor reaches the full output, it is disconnected from the
drive and switched to direct on-line connection, with a slight delay in between.
Auxiliary motor 2 is connected to drive output. After a slight delay the motor speed is
increased to fulfil the pumping capacity needed.
Auxiliary motors 3 and 4 are started according to the same routine.
The motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine.
The most important differences between PFC control and SPFC control default
settings are in acceleration time (2202), deceleration time (2203) and auxiliary motor
stop delay (8116) parameters.
See also section SPFC Control macro on page 109.
Settings
Diagnostics
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of
motors
Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Pump protection (pressure monitoring) settings
Group 81 PFC CONTROL PFC control settings
0116 Application block output signal
0162 RO 1 status
0173 RO 2…4 status. With option MREL-01 only.
Alarm
AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange function active
PFC I LOCK PFC interlocks active
INLET LOW, INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump/fan inlet too low
OUTLET HIGH, OUTLET VERY
HIGH
Pressure at pump/fan outlet too high
Fault Additional information
PAR PFC REF NEG 2007 < 0
PAR PFC IO 1 Not enough relays parameterized for PFC.
Conflict between group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS,
parameter 8117 and parameter 8118.
PAR PFC IO 2 Parameter 8127 does not match the PFC motors in
group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118
PAR PFC IO 3 Allocation of a digital input (interlock) for each PFC
motor not possible
INLET LOW, INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump/fan inlet too low
OUTLET HIGH, OUTLET VERY
HIGH
Pressure at pump/fan outlet too high

Actual signals and parameters 149
12
Actual signals and parameters
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus
equivalent values for each signal/parameter. It also contains a table of the default
values for the different macros.
Note: When the control panel is in the short parameter view, ie when parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 (SHORT VIEW), the control panel only shows a
subset of all signals and parameters. The list of these signals and parameters starts
on page 152.
To be able to view all actual signals and parameters, set parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW). The descriptions of all actual signals and
parameters start on pages 154 and 161, respectively.
Terms and abbreviations
Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user.
No user setting possible. Groups 01…04 contain actual signals.
Def Parameter default value
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive. Groups 10…99 contain
parameters.
Note: Parameter selections are shown on the Basic Control Panel as integer
values. Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as
value 10 (which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq).
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value and the integer used in
serial communication.
E Refers to types 03E- with European parametrization
U Refers to types 03U- with US parametrization

150 Actual signals and parameters
Fieldbus equivalent
Example: If 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (see page 183) is set from an external control
system, an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0.1 Hz. All the read and sent values are
limited to 16 bits (-32768…32767).

Default values with different macros
When application macro is changed (9902 APPLIC MACRO), the software updates
the parameter values to their default values. The table below includes the parameter
default values for different macros. For other parameters, the default values are the
same for all macros. See the parameter list starting on page 161.
Index Name/
Selection
ABB
STANDARD
3-WIRE ALTERNA
TE
MOTOR
POT
HAND/
AUTO
PID
CONTROL
PFC
CONTROL
SPFC
CONTROL
9902 APPLIC
MACRO
1 = ABB
STANDARD
2 = 3-WIRE 3 = ALTER
NATE
4=MOTOR
POT
5 =
HAND/AU
TO
6 = PID
CONTROL
7 = PFC
CONTROL
15 = SPFC
CONTROL
1001 EXT1
COMMANDS
DI1,2 DI1P,2P,3 DI1F,2R DI1,2 DI1,2 DI1 DI1 DI1
1002 EXT2
COMMANDS
NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL DI5,4 DI5 DI5 DI5
1003 DIRECTION REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD
1102 EXT1/EXT2
SEL
EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 DI3 DI2 DI2 DI2
1103 REF1
SELECT
AI1 AI1 AI1 DI3U,
4D(NC)
AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1
1106 REF2
SELECT
AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 PID1OUT PID1OUT PID1OUT
1201 CONST
SPEED SEL
DI3,4 DI4,5 DI3,4 DI5 NOT SEL DI3 NOT SEL NOT SEL
1304 MINIMUM AI2 1.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0%
1401 RELAY
OUTPUT 1
FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) PFC PFC
1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL DI4 NOT SEL NOT SEL
1805 DO SIGNAL FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) PFC
2008 MAXIMUM
FREQ
50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 52.0 Hz 52.0 Hz
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2
SEL
DI5 NOT SEL DI5 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
2202 ACCELER
TIME 1
5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 30.0 s
2203 DECELER
TIME 1
5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 30.0 s
3019 COMMFAULT
TIME
3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 10.0 s
4001 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5
4002 INTEGRATION
TIME
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s
4101 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5
4102 INTEGRATION
TIME
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s
8116 AUX MOT
STOP D
3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 20.0 s
8118 AUTOCHNG
INTERV
NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 0.1 h
8123 PFC ENABLE NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL ACTIVE SPFC
ACTIVE

Actual signals in the short parameter view
Parameters in the short parameter view
Actual signals in the short parameter view
No. Name/Value Description FbEq
04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history (read-only). See group 04 FAULT HISTORY in
the list of all parameters.
0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default
11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Panel reference type, external control location selection and
external reference sources and limits. See group 11
REFERENCE SELECT in the list of all parameters.
1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1. E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS
Constant speed (drive output frequency) selection and
values. See group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS in the list of all
parameters.
1202 CONST
SPEED 1
Defines constant drive output frequency 1. E: 5.0 Hz
U: 6.0 Hz
1203 CONST
SPEED 2
Defines constant drive output frequency 2. E:10.0 Hz
U: 12.0 Hz
1204 CONST
SPEED 3
Defines constant drive output frequency 3. E:15.0 Hz
U: 18.0 Hz
13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing. See group 13 ANALOG
INPUTS in the list of all parameters.
1301 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum %-value that corresponds to minimum
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1.
1.0%
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output, and relay
operating delays. See group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS in the list
of all parameters.
1401 RELAY
OUTPUT 1
Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1. FAULT(-1)
16 SYSTEM
CONTROLS
Parameter view, Run Enable, parameter lock etc. See group
16 SYSTEM CONTROLS in the list of all parameters.
1611 PARAMETER
VIEW
Selects the parameter view, ie which parameters are shown
on the control panel.
SHORT
VIEW
20 LIMITS Drive operation limits. See group 20 LIMITS in the list of all
parameters.
2008 MAXIMUM
FREQ
Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor. See group 21
START/STOP in the list of all parameters.
2102 STOP
FUNCTION
Selects the motor stop function. COAST

22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times. See group 22
ACCEL/DECEL in the list of all parameters.
2202 ACCELER
TIME 1
Defines the acceleration time 1. 5.0 s
2203 DECELER
TIME 1
Defines the deceleration time 1. 5.0 s
99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data. See
group 99 START-UP DATA in the list of all parameters.
9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language. ENGLISH
9902 APPLIC
MACRO
Selects the application macro. ABB
STANDA
RD
9905 MOTOR NOM
VOLT
Defines the nominal motor voltage. 230 V
(200 V
units)
400 V
(400 V
E units)
460 V
(400 V
U units)
9906 MOTOR NOM
CURR
Defines the nominal motor current. I2N
9907 MOTOR NOM
FREQ
Defines the nominal motor frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM
SPEED
Defines the nominal motor speed. Type
dependent
9909 MOTOR NOM
POWER
Defines the nominal motor power. PN
No. Name/Value Description Default

All actual signals
All actual signals
01 OPERATING
DATA
Basic signals for monitoring the drive (read-only)
0101 SPEED & DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm. A negative value indicates
reverse direction.
1 = 1 rpm
0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 = 1 rpm
0103 OUTPUT
FREQ
Calculated drive output frequency in Hz. (Shown by default
on the panel Output mode display.)
1 = 0.1 Hz
0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A. (Shown by default on the
panel Output mode display.)
1 = 0.1 A
0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the motor nominal
torque
1 = 0.1%
0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 1 = 0.1
kW
0107 DC BUS
VOLTAGE
Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC 1 = 1 V
0109 OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
Calculated motor voltage in V AC 1 = 1 V
0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in °C 1 = 0.1 °C
0111 EXTERNAL
REF 1
External reference REF1 in Hz 1 = 0.1 Hz
0112 EXTERNAL
REF 2
External reference REF2 in percent. Depending on the use,
100% equals the maximum motor speed, nominal motor
torque, or maximum process reference.
1 = 0.1%
0113 CTRL
LOCATION
Active control location. (0) LOCAL; (1) EXT1; (2) EXT2. See
section Local control vs. external control on page 115.
1 = 1
0114 RUN TIME (R) Elapsed drive running time counter (hours). Runs when the
drive is modulating. The counter can be reset by pressing
the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control
panel is in the Parameter mode.
1 = 1 h
0115 KWH
COUNTER (R)
kWh counter. The counter can be reset by pressing UP and
DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in
the Parameter mode.
1 = 1 kWh
0116 APPL BLK
OUTPUT
Application block output signal. Value is from either PFC
control, if PFC control is active, or from parameter 0112
EXTERNAL REF 2.
1 = 0.1%
0120 AI 1 Relative value of analog input AI1 in percent 1 = 0.1%
0121 AI 2 Relative value of analog input AI2 in percent 1 = 0.1%
0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA 1 = 0.1
mA
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 1 = 0.1%
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 = 0.1%
0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the process PID1 controller.
Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT, 4007 UNIT SCALE
and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
-
0129 PID 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the PID2 controller. Unit
depends on parameter 4106 UNIT and 4107 UNIT SCALE
settings.
-

0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller. Unit
depends on parameter 4006 UNIT, 4007 UNIT SCALE and
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
-
0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller. Unit depends on
parameter 4106 UNIT and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings.
-
0132 PID 1
DEVIATION
Deviation of the process PID1 controller, ie the difference
between the reference value and the actual value. Unit
depends on parameter 4006 UNIT, 4007 UNIT SCALE and
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
-
0133 PID 2
DEVIATION
Deviation of the PID2 controller, ie the difference between
the reference value and the actual value. Unit depends on
parameter 4106 UNIT and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings.
-
0134 COMM RO
WORD
Relay output Control Word through fieldbus (decimal). See
parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1 = 1
0135 COMM VALUE
1
Data received from fieldbus 1 = 1
0136 COMM VALUE
2
Data received from fieldbus 1 = 1
0137 PROCESS
VAR 1
Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL
DISPLAY
-
0138 PROCESS
VAR 2
DISPLAY
-
0139 PROCESS
VAR 3
DISPLAY
-
0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter (thousands of hours).
Runs when the drive is modulating. Counter cannot be
reset.
1 = 0.01
kh
0141 MWH
COUNTER
MWH counter. Counter cannot be reset. 1 = 1
MWh
0142 REVOLUTION
CNTR
Motor revolution counter (millions of revolutions). The
counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons
simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter
mode.
1 = 1
Mrev
0143 DRIVE ON
TIME HI
Drive control board power-on time in days. Counter cannot
be reset.
1 = 1
days
0144 DRIVE ON
TIME LO
Drive control board power-on time in 2 second ticks (30
ticks = 60 seconds). Counter cannot be reset.
1 = 2 s
0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature. Unit depends on the sensor
type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS
parameters.
1 = 1
0158 PID COMM
VALUE 1
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1
0159 PID COMM
VALUE 2
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1
0160 DI 1-5 STATUS Status of digital inputs.
Example: 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.
0161 PULSE INPUT
FREQ
Value of frequency input in Hz 1 = 1 Hz
All actual signals

0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1. 1 = RO is energized, 0 = RO is de-
energized.
1 = 1
0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output, when transistor output is used as
a digital output.
1 = 1
0164 TO
FREQUENCY
Transistor output frequency, when transistor output is used
as a frequency output.
1 = 1 Hz
0173 RO 2-4
STATUS
Status of the relays in the Relay Output Extension Module
MREL-0. See MREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module
User's Manual (3AUA0000035974 [English]).
Example: 100 = RO 2 is on, RO 3 and RO 4 are off.
0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when
the pump is connected directly to the supply. Can be reset
with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy
calculators at the same time). See group 45 ENERGY
SAVING.
1 = 0.1
kWh
0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when
the pump is connected directly to the supply. Can be reset
with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy
calculators at the same time). See group 45 ENERGY
SAVING.
1 = 1
MWh
0176 SAVED
AMOUNT 1
Energy saved in local currency. To find out the total saved
energy in currency units, add the value of parameter 0177
multiplied by 1000 to the value of parameter 0176.
Example:
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 = 123.4
0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 = 5
Total saved energy = 5 · 1000 + 123.4 = 5123.4 currency
units.
Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY
PRICE. Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY
RESET (resets all energy calculators at the same time). See
group 45 ENERGY SAVING.
1 = 0.1
(Currency)
0177 SAVED
AMOUNT 2
Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units.
Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units. See parameter 0176
SAVED AMOUNT 1.
Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY
PRICE. Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY
1 = 1000
(Currency)
0178 SAVED CO2 Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn. CO2
conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV
FACTOR. Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY
1 = 0.1 tn
03 FB ACTUAL
SIGNALS
Data words for monitoring the fieldbus communication
(read-only). Each signal is a 16-bit data word.
Data words are displayed on the panel in hexadecimal
format.
0301 FB CMD
WORD 1
A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
on page 283.
0302 FB CMD
WORD 2
on page 283
All actual signals

0303 FB STS WORD
1
on page 283.
0304 FB STS WORD
2
on page 283
0305 FAULT WORD
1
A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies
and fieldbus equivalents, see chapter Fault tracing on page
287.
Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT
Bit 1 = DC OVERVOLT
Bit 2 = DEV OVERTEMP
Bit 3 = SHORT CIRC
Bit 4 = Reserved
Bit 5 = DC UNDERVOLT
Bit 6 = AI1 LOSS
Bit 7 = AI2 LOSS
Bit 8 = MOT OVERTEMP
Bit 9 = PANEL LOSS
Bit 10 = Reserved
Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL
Bit 12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = EXT FAULT 1
Bit 14 = EXT FAULT 2
Bit 15 = EARTH FAULT
0306 FAULT WORD
2
287.
Bit 0 = Reserved
Bit 1 = THERM FAIL
Bit 2…3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = CURR MEAS
Bit 5 = SUPPLY PHASE
Bit 6 = Reserved
Bit 7 = OVERSPEED
Bit 8 = Reserved
Bit 9 = DRIVE ID
Bit 10 = CONFIG FILE
Bit 11 = SERIAL 1 ERR
Bit 12 = EFB CON FILE
Bit 13 = FORCE TRIP
Bit 14 = MOTOR PHASE
Bit 15 = OUTP WIRING
All actual signals

0307 FAULT WORD
3
287.
Bit 0 = EFB 1
Bit 1 = EFB 2
Bit 2 = EFB 3
Bit 3 = INCOMPATIBLE SW
Bit 4 = USER LOAD CURVE
Bit 5 = UNKNOWN EXTENSION
Bit 6 = INLET VERY LOW
Bit 7 = OUTLET VERY HIGH
Bit 8 = INLET LOW
Bit 9 = OUTLET HIGH
Bit 10…14 = System error
Bit 15 = Parameter setting fault
0308 ALARM WORD
1
287.
An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word:
Write zero to the word.
Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT
Bit 1 = OVERVOLTAGE
Bit 2 = UNDERVOLTAGE
Bit 3 = DIRLOCK
Bit 4 = IO COMM
Bit 5 = AI1 LOSS
Bit 6 = AI2 LOSS
Bit 7 = PANEL LOSS
Bit 8 = DEVICE OVERTEMP
Bit 9 = MOTOR TEMP
Bit 10 = Reserved
Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL
Bit 12 = AUTORESET
Bit 13 = PFC AUTOCHANGE
Bit 14 = PFC ILOCK
Bit 15 = Reserved
0309 ALARM WORD
2
287.
Bit 0 = Reserved
Bit 1 = PID SLEEP
All actual signals

Bit 2 = Reserved
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = START ENABLE 1 MISSING
Bit 5 = START ENABLE 2 MISSING
Bit 6 = EMERGENCY STOP
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = FIRST START
Bit 9 = Reserved
Bit 10 = USER LOAD CURVE
Bit 11 = START DELAY
Bit 12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = INLET LOW
Bit 14 = OUTLET HIGH
Bit 15 = PIPE FILL
0310 ALARM WORD
3
287.
Bit 0 = INLET VERY LOW
Bit 1 = OUTLET VERY HIGH
Bit 2…15 = Reserved
04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history (read-only)
0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing on page
287 for the codes. 0 = Fault history is clear (on panel display
= NO RECORD).
1 = 1
0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred.
Format: Date if the real time clock is operating. / The
number of days elapsed after the power-on if the real time
clock is not used, or was not set.
1 = 1
days
0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred.
Format on the assistant panel: Real time (hh:mm:ss) if the
real time clock is operating. / Time elapsed after the power-
on (hh:mm:ss minus the whole days stated by signal 0402
FAULT TIME 1) if real time clock is not used, or was not set.
Format on the basic panel: Time elapsed after power-on in 2
second ticks (minus the whole days stated by signal 0402
FAULT TIME 1). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. Eg Value 514
equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (= 514/30).
0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 1 rpm
0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 Hz
0406 VOLTAGE AT
FLT
Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest
fault occurred
1 = 0.1 V
0407 CURRENT AT
FLT
Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 A
All actual signals

0408 TORQUE AT
FLT
Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque at the
time the latest fault occurred
1 = 0.1%
0409 STATUS AT
FLT
Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest
fault occurred
0412 PREVIOUS
FAULT 1
Fault code of the 2nd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing
on page 287 for the codes.
1 = 1
0413 PREVIOUS
FAULT 2
Fault code of the 3rd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing
on page 287 for the codes.
1 = 1
0414 DI 1-5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1…5 at the time the latest fault
occurred (binary).
Example: 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.
All actual signals

All parameters
All parameters
No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq
10 START/STOP/DIR The sources for external start, stop and direction control
1001 EXT1
COMMANDS
Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop
and direction commands for external control location 1
(EXT1).
DI1,2
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source 0
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start.
Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
(setting REQUEST = FORWARD).
1
DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start.
Direction through digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse.
To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting
must be REQUEST.
2
DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to
start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the
pulse fed to DI1.)
Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction
of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input),
the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled.
3
DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to
start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the
pulse fed to DI1.)
Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction
through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be
REQUEST.
4
DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start
forward. Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1:
Start reverse. (In order to start the drive, digital input DI3
must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1/DI2). Pulse
stop through digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: Stop. To control the
REQUEST.
5
KEYPAD Start, stop and direction commands through control panel
when EXT1 is active. To control the direction, parameter
1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST.
8
DI1F,2R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs
DI1 and DI2.
Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST.
9
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop
commands, ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits
0…1. The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via
the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the
drive. For the control word bits, see section DCU
communication profile on page 283.
10
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start/stop control. Timed function 1 active = start,
timed function 1 inactive = stop. See parameter group 36
TIMED FUNCTIONS.
11
TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1. 12
DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start.
Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
20
DI5,4 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start.
Direction through digital input DI4. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse.
To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
21
SUPRV1
OVER
Start when the value of supervision parameter 1 goes over
the supervision high limit. Stop when the value goes below
the low limit. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
27
SUPRV1
UNDER
Start when the value of the supervision parameter 1 goes
below the low limit. Stop when the value goes over the high
limit. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
28
SUPRV2
OVER
See selection SUPRV1 OVER. 29
SUPRV2
UNDER
See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. 30
SUPRV3
OVER
SUPRV3
UNDER
See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. 32
SUP1OVER+
DI2
Start and stop as for SUPRV1 OVER. Direction through
digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
REQUEST.
33
SUP1
UDR+DI2
Start and stop as for SUPRV1 UNDER. Direction through
digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
REQUEST.
34
1002 EXT2
COMMANDS
Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop
and direction commands for external control location 2
(EXT2).
NOT SEL
See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS.
1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes
the direction.
Note: The Pump cleaning function can override this
parameter. See parameter 4601 PUMP CLEAN TRIG.
REQUEST
FORWARD Fixed to forward 1
All parameters

REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2
REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 3
11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Panel reference type, external control location selection and
external reference sources and limits
1101 KEYPAD REF
SEL
Selects the type of the reference in local control mode. REF1
REF1(Hz/rpm) Frequency reference in Hz 1
REF2(%) %-reference 2
1102 EXT1/EXT2
SEL
Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal
that selects between the two external control locations,
EXT1 or EXT2.
EXT1
EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by
parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1
SELECT.
0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1
DI2 See selection DI1. 2
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by
parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2
SELECT.
7
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1/EXT2 selection,
ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 (with ABB
Drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11). The control word is
sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or
embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the control
word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page
283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278.
8
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed EXT1/EXT2 control selection. Timed function 1 active
= EXT2, timed function 1 inactive = EXT1. See parameter
group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
9
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = EXT1, 0 = EXT2. -1
DI2(INV) See selection DI1(INV). -2
1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1. See
section Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 on page
117.
AI1
KEYPAD Control panel 0
AI1 Analog input AI1 1
All parameters

AI1/JOYST Analog input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs
the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse
direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in
the forward direction. Minimum and maximum references
are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1
MAX.
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to
REQUEST.
WARNING! If parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 is set to
0 V and analog input signal is lost (ie 0 V), the rotation
of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference. Set the
following parameters to activate a fault when analog input
signal is lost:
Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 to 20% (2 V or 4 mA).
Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to 5% or higher.
Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to FAULT.
3
AI2/JOYST See selection AI1/JOYST. 4
DI3U,4D(R) Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4:
Reference decrease. Stop command resets the reference to
zero. Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of
the reference change.
5
DI3U,4D Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4:
Reference decrease. The program stores the active speed
reference (not reset by a stop command). When the drive is
restarted, the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration
rate to the stored reference. Parameter 2205 ACCELER
TIME2 defines the rate of the reference change.
6
COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 8
COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input AI.
See section Reference selection and correction on page
271.
9
COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input
AI1. See section Reference selection and correction on
page 271.
10
DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4:
zero. The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from
LOC to REM). Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines
the rate of the reference change.
11
All parameters
1104
-1104
-1105
1105
par. 1301 = 20%, par 1302 = 100%
+2%-2%0
Speed ref
(REF1)
AI1
1104
-1104
2 V / 4 mA 10 V / 20 mA6
Hysteresis 4%
of full scale

DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4:
Reference decrease. The program stores the active speed
reference (not reset by a stop command). The reference is
not saved if the control source is changed (from EXT1 to
EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM). When the
drive is restarted, the motor ramps up at the selected
acceleration rate to the stored reference. Parameter 2205
ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change.
12
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
14
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%)
15
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
16
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
17
KEYPAD(RNC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop
command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for
reset.). The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1).
20
KEYPAD(NC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop
command does not reset the reference to zero. The
reference is stored. The reference is not saved if the control
source is changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to
EXT1).
21
DI4U,5D See selection DI3U,4D. 30
DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31
FREQ INPUT Frequency input 32
1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1.
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source
signal.
0.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Minimum value in Hz.
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the reference
source (value of parameter 1103 is AI1). The reference
minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM
AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows:
1 = 0.1 Hz
All parameters
REF (Hz)
REF1 MAX
(1105)
REF1 MIN
(1104)
-REF1 MIN
(1104)
-REF1 MAX
(1105)
AI1 signal (%)1302 1301
1301 1302

1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1.
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source
signal.
E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Maximum value in Hz. See the example for parameter 1104
REF1 MIN.
1 = 0.1 Hz
1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. AI2
KEYPAD See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 0
AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 1
AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 2
AI1/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 3
AI2/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 4
DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 5
DI3U,4D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 6
COMM See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 8
COMM+AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 9
COMM*AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 10
DI3U,4D(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 11
DI3U,4D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 12
AI1+AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 14
AI1*AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 15
AI1-AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 16
AI1/AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 17
PID1OUT PID controller 1 output. See parameter groups
40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2.
19
KEYPAD(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 20
KEYPAD(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 21
DI4U,5D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 30
DI4U,5D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 31
FREQ INPUT See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 32
1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2.
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source
signal.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum frequency / maximum
speed / nominal torque. See the example for parameter
1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal
limits.
1 = 0.1%
1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2.
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source
signal.
100.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum frequency / maximum
speed / nominal torque. See the example for parameter
1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal
limits.
1 = 0.1%
All parameters

12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS
Constant speed (drive output frequency) selection and
values. See section Constant speeds on page 127.
1201 CONST
SPEED SEL
Activates the constant speeds (drive output frequencies) or
selects the activation signal.
DI3,4
NOT SEL No constant speed in use 0
DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is
activated through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive.
1
2
3
4
5
DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and
DI2.1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
7
DI2,3 See selection DI1,2. 8
DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1, DI2 and
DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
12
DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 13
TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference, speed defined by parameter
1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter
1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used, depending on parameter
1209 TIMED MODE SEL and timed function 1. See
parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
15
All parameters
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1
DI DI2 DI3 Operation
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1

TIMED
FUN1&2
Speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2.
See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL.
19
DI1(INV) Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is
activated through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 =
inactive.
-1
inactive.
-2
inactive.
-3
inactive.
-4
inactive.
-5
DI1,2(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1
and DI2. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
-7
DI2,3(INV) See selection DI1,2(INV). -8
DI1,2,3(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1,
DI2 and DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
-12
DI3,4,5(INV) See selection DI1,2,3(INV). -13
1202 CONST
SPEED 1
Defines constant speed (drive output frequency) 1. E: 5.0 Hz
U: 6.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 = 0.1 Hz
1203 CONST
SPEED 2
U: 12.0 Hz
All parameters
DI1 DI2 Operation
1 1 No constant speed
DI DI2 DI3 Operation
1 1 1 No constant speed

1204 CONST
SPEED 3
U: 18.0 Hz
1205 CONST
SPEED 4
U: 24.0 Hz
1206 CONST
SPEED 5
Defines constant speed (drive output frequency)) 5. E: 25.0 Hz
U: 30.0 Hz
1207 CONST
SPEED 6
U: 48.0 Hz
1208 CONST
SPEED 7
Defines constant speed (drive output frequency) 7.
Constant speed 7 is used also with fault functions (3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL COMM ERR).
E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
1209 TIMED MODE
SEL
Selects timed function activated speed into use when
parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED
FUNC 1…4 or TIMED FUN1&2.
CS1/2/3/4
EXT/CS1/2/3 External speed reference or constant speed selection with
TIMED FUNC n.1 = timed function active, 0 = timed function
inactive.
External speed reference or constant speed selection with
TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2. 1 = timed function
active, 0 = timed function inactive.
1
All parameters
TIMED
FUNC n
Operation
0 External reference
1 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1
TIMED
FUNC 1
TIMED
FUNC 2
Operation
0 0 External reference
1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST
SPEED 1
SPEED 2
SPEED 3

CS1/2/3/4 Constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC n. 1 = timed
function active, 0 = timed function inactive.
Constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED
FUNC 2. 1 = timed function active, 0 = timed function
inactive.
2
13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as a
reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum
setting.
0…20 mA 0…100%
4…20 mA 20…100%
-10…10 mA -50…50%
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external
reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of
parameter 1104 REF1 MIN.
Note: MINIMUM AI value must not exceed MAXIMUM AI
value.
1.0%
-100.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range.
Example: If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA, the
percent value for 0…20 mA range is:
(4 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 20%
1 = 0.1%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to
maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as
a reference, the value corresponds to the reference
maximum setting.
0…20 mA 0…100%
4…20 mA 20…100%
-10…10 mA -50…50%
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external
reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of
parameter 1105 REF1 MAX.
100.0%
All parameters
TIMED
FUNC n
Operation
0 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST
SPEED 1
1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST
SPEED 2
TIMED
FUNC 1
TIMED
FUNC 2
Operation
0 0 Speed defined by parameter 1202
CONST SPEED 1
CONST SPEED 2
CONST SPEED 3
CONST SPEED 4
=
=
=
=
=
=

-100.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range.
Example: If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA,
the percent value for 0…20 mA range is:
(10 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 50%
1 = 0.1%
1303 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1, ie the
time within 63% of a step change is reached.
0.1 s
0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant 1 = 0.1 s
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See parameter 1301
MINIMUM AI1.
1.0%
-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1%
1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to
maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See
parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1.
100.0%
-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1%
1306 FILTER AI2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See
parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
0.1 s
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output, and relay
operating delays.
Note: Relay outputs 2…4 are available only if the Relay
Output Extension Module MREL-0 is connected to the drive.
See MREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module User's
Manual (3AUA0000035974 [English]).
1401 RELAY
OUTPUT 1
Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1.
The relay energizes when the status meets the setting.
FAULT(-1)
NOT SEL Not used 0
READY Ready to function: Run Enable signal on, no fault, supply
voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal
off.
1
RUN Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active
fault.
2
FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energized on a fault trip. 3
FAULT Fault 4
ALARM Alarm 5
REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 6
All parameters
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal
Time constant
63
100
%
t

STARTED The drive has received start command. Relay is energized
even if Run Enable signal is off. Relay is de-energized when
drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
7
SUPRV1
OVER
Status according to supervision parameters 3201…3203.
See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
8
SUPRV1
UNDER
SUPRV2
OVER
10
SUPRV2
UNDER
SUPRV3
OVER
12
SUPRV3
UNDER
AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency. 14
FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See
parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
15
FLT/ALARM Fault or alarm 16
EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 17
REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 18
CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12
CONSTANT SPEEDS.
19
REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost. 20
OVERCURRENT Alarm/Fault by overcurrent protection function 21
OVERVOLTAGE Alarm/Fault by overvoltage protection function 22
DRIVE TEMP Alarm/Fault by drive overtemperature protection function 23
UNDERVOLTA
GE
Alarm/Fault by undervoltage protection function 24
AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal is lost. 25
AI2 LOSS Analog input AI2 signal is lost. 26
MOTOR TEMP Alarm/Fault by motor overtemperature protection function.
See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT.
27
STALL Alarm/Fault by stall protection function. See parameter 3010
STALL FUNCTION.
28
PID SLEEP PID sleep function. See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID
SET 1/41 PROCESS PID SET 2.
30
PFC Start/stop motor in PFC control. See parameter group 81
PFC CONTROL. Use this option only when PFC control is
used. Selection activated/deactivated when the drive is not
running.
31
AUTOCHANGE PFC autochange operation is performed. Use this option
only when PFC control is used.
32
FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque. 33
USER MACRO
2
User Macro 2 is active. 34
All parameters

COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = de-
energize output, 1 = energize output.
35
COMM(-1) Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = de-
energize output, 1 = energize output
36
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active. See parameter group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS.
37
FUNCTIONS.
38
FUNCTIONS.
39
FUNCTIONS.
40
M.TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered. See
parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG.
41
M.TRIG REV Revolutions counter is triggered. See parameter group 29
MAINTENANCE TRIG.
42
M.TRIG RUN Run time counter is triggered. See parameter group 29
MAINTENANCE TRIG.
43
M.TRIG MWH MWh counter is triggered. See parameter group 29
MAINTENANCE TRIG.
44
START DELAY Start delay is active. 46
USER LOAD C Alarm/Fault from the user load curve. See parameter group
37 USER LOAD CURVE.
47
PIPE FILL Pipe Fill function is active. See parameters 4421…4426. 53
PROFILE
HIGH
Actual signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT, 0132 PID 1
DEVIATION or 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION has stayed over
limit 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM longer than the time defined
by parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY. See parameters
4418…4420.
54
INLET PROT Pump inlet protection function is active or has caused the
drive to trip. See parameters 4401…4408.
55
OUTLET PROT Pump outlet protection function is active or has caused the
drive to trip. See parameters 4409…4416.
56
1402 RELAY
OUTPUT 2
See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1. Available only if
the Relay Output Extension Module MREL-0 is connected
to the drive.
NOT SEL
All parameters
0134 value Binary DO RO
0 000000 0 0
1 000001 0 1
2 000010 1 0
3 000011 1 1
0134 value Binary DO RO
0 000000 1 1
1 000001 1 0
2 000010 0 1
3 000011 0 0

1403 RELAY
OUTPUT 3
to the drive.
NOT SEL
1404 RO 1 ON
DELAY
Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. The figure below illustrates the operation (on)
and release (off) delays for relay output RO.
1 = 0.1 s
1405 RO 1 OFF
DELAY
Defines the release delay for relay output RO. 0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON
DELAY.
1 = 0.1 s
1406 RO 2 ON
DELAY
See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY. 0.0 s
1407 RO 2 OFF
DELAY
See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY. 0.0 s
1408 RO 3 ON
DELAY
1409 RO 3 OFF
DELAY
1410 RELAY
OUTPUT 4
to the drive.
NOT SEL
1413 RO 4 ON
DELAY
1414 RO 4 OFF
DELAY
15 ANALOG
OUTPUTS
Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through
analog output and output signal processing.
1501 AO1
CONTENT SEL
Connects a drive signal to analog output AO. 103
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 =
0102 SPEED.
All parameters
Control event
Relay status
1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY

1502 AO1
CONTENT MIN
Defines the minimum value for signal selected with
parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL.
AO minimum and maximum correspond the 1504 MINIMUM
AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as follows:
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT
SEL setting.
-
1503 AO1
CONTENT
MAX
Defines the maximum value for signal selected with
parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL. See the figure for
parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT
SEL setting.
-
1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO.
See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
0.0 mA
0.0…20.0 mA Minimum value 1 = 0.1
mA
1505 MAXIMUM
AO1
Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO.
See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
20.0 mA
0.0…20.0 mA Maximum value 1 = 0.1
mA
1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO, ie the
time within 63% of a step change is reached. See the figure
for parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
0.1 s
16 SYSTEM
CONTROLS
Parameter view, Run Enable, parameter lock etc.
1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run Enable signal. NOT SEL
NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run Enable
signal.
0
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run
Enable. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will
not start or coasts to stop if it is running.
1
All parameters
1505
1504
1502 1503
1505
1504
1503 1502AO
content
AO (mA) AO (mA)
AO
content

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run Enable
signal (Run Disable), ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD
1 bit 6 (with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3). The
control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the
word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page
283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278.
7
DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0
= Run Enable. If Run Enable signal is switched on, the drive
will not start or coasts to stop if it is running.
-1
DI2(INV) See selection DI1(INV) -2
1602 PARAMETER
LOCK
Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents
parameter changing from control panel.
OPEN
LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control
panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to
parameter 1603 PASS CODE.
The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by
macros or fieldbus.
0
OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 1
NOT SAVED Parameter changes made by control panel are not stored
into the permanent memory. To store changed parameter
values, set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE.
2
1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see
parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK).
0
0…65535 Pass code. Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts
back to 0 automatically.
1 = 1
1604 FAULT RESET
SEL
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal
resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
KEYPAD
KEYPAD Fault reset only from the control panel 0
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 (reset on the rising edge of
DI1) or by control panel
1
START/STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital
input, or by control panel.
Note: Do not use this option when start, stop and direction
commands are received through fieldbus communication.
7
All parameters

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal, ie
control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 (with ABB drives
profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7). The control word is sent by
the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus (Modbus)
to the drive. For the control word bits, see sections DCU
communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives
communication profile on page 278.
8
DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1 (reset on the falling
edge of DI1) or by control panel
-1
1605 USER PAR
SET CHG
Enables the change of the User Parameter Set through a
digital input. See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO. The
change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During
the change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Parameter Set by parameter
9902 after changing any parameter setting, or reperforming
the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user
are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed. Any
unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the
User Parameter Sets. A setting once made remains despite
User Parameter Set change.
Note: Selection of User Parameter Set 2 can be supervised
via relay outputs RO…R4 and digital output DO. See
parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 … 1403 RELAY
OUTPUT 3, 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO
SIGNAL.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL User Parameter Set change is not possible through a digital
input. Parameter Sets can be changed only from control
panel.
0
DI1 User Parameter Set control through digital input DI1. Falling
edge of digital input DI1: User Parameter Set 1 is loaded
into use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User Parameter
Set 2 is loaded into use.
1
DI1(INV) User Parameter Set control through inverted digital input
DI1. Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1: User
Parameter Set 2 is loaded into use. Rising edge of inverted
digital input DI1: User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use.
-1
All parameters

1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source
for the local control mode lock signal. When local lock is
active, entering the local control mode is disabled
(LOC/REM key of the panel).
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Local control is allowed. 0
DI1 Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1.
Rising edge of digital input DI1: Local control disabled.
Falling edge of digital input DI1: Local control allowed.
1
ON Local control is disabled. 7
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock, ie control
word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14. The control word is
sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or
word bits, see section DCU communication profile on page
283.
Note: This setting applies only for the DCU profile.
8
DI1(INV) Local lock through inverted digital input DI1. Rising edge of
inverted digital input DI1: Local control allowed. Falling edge
of inverted digital input DI1: Local control disabled.
-1
1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent
memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved
automatically when changed from the panel but not when
altered through a fieldbus connection.
DONE
DONE Saving completed 0
SAVE... Saving in progress 1
All parameters

1608 START
ENABLE 1
Selects the source for the Start Enable 1 signal.
Note: Functionality of the Start Enable signal is different
from the Run Enable signal.
Example: External damper control application using Start
Enable and Run Enable. Motor can start only after the
damper is fully open.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Start Enable signal is on. 0
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Start
Enable. If Start Enable signal is switched off, the drive will
not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START
ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated
1
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start
Enable (Start Disable) signal, ie control word 0302 FB CMD
WORD 2 bit 18 (bit 19 for Start Enable 2). The control word
is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or
word bits, see section DCU communication profile on page
283.
7
DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0
= Start Enable. If Start Enable signal is switched off, the
drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and
alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated.
-1
All parameters
Drive started
Start Enable
signals
(1608 and 1609)
Started
output status
(group 14)
Damper
opening
time
Damper
closed
Damper
closing
time
Damper
status
Relay energized
Damper open
Relay
de-
energized
Damper
closed
Motor
status
Run Enable signal
from the damper end
switch when the
damper is fully
opened. (1601)
Acceleration
time (2202)
Deceleration
time (2203)
Motor
speed
Start/Stop
command
(group 10)

1609 START
ENABLE 2
Selects the source for the Start Enable 2 signal. See
parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1.
NOT SEL
See parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1.
1610 DISPLAY
ALARMS
Activates/deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT (2001),
OVERVOLTAGE (2002), UNDERVOLTAGE (2003) and
DEVICE OVERTEMP (2009). For more information see
chapter Fault tracing on page 287.
NO
NO Alarms are inactive. 0
YES Alarms are active. 1
1611 PARAMETER
VIEW
Selects the parameter view, ie which parameters are shown
on the control panel.
SHORT
VIEW
FLASHDROP Shows the FlashDrop parameter list. Does not include the
short parameter list. Parameters which are hidden by the
FlashDrop device are not visible.
FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting
parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 (LOAD FD SET).
1
SHORT VIEW Shows only a subset of all signals and parameters. See
section Actual signals in the short parameter view on page
152 and Parameters in the short parameter view on page
152.
2
LONG VIEW Shows all signals (section All actual signals on page 154)
and parameters (this table, starting on page 161).
3
18 FREQ IN & TRAN
OUT
Frequency input and transistor output signal processing.
1801 FREQ INPUT
MIN
Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a
frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 123.
0 Hz
0…10000 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 1 Hz
1802 FREQ INPUT
MAX
Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a
frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 123.
1000 Hz
0…10000 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 1 Hz
1803 FILTER FREQ
IN
Defines the filter time constant for frequency input, ie the
time within 63% of a step change is reached. See section
Frequency input on page 123.
0.1 s
1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO.
See section Transistor output on page 124.
DIGITAL
DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO. 0
FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO. 1
1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO. FAULT(-1)
See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters

1807 DO OFF
DELAY
Defines the release delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1808 FO CONTENT
SEL
Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output
FO.
104
0102 SPEED.
1809 FO CONTENT
MIN
Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value.
Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL.
FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM
FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows:
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT
SEL setting.
-
1810 FO CONTENT
MAX
Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value.
Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL.
See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN.
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT
SEL setting.
-
1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO. 10 Hz
10…16000 Hz Minimum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT
MIN.
1 = 1 Hz
1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO. 1000 Hz
10…16000 Hz Maximum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT
MIN.
1 = 1 Hz
1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO, ie
the time within 63% of a step change is reached.
0.1 s
1814 DI1 ON DELAY Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of
the digital input DI to the ON state.
0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1815 DI1 OFF
DELAY
Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of
the digital input DI to the OFF state.
0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1816 DI2 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY. 0.0 s
1817 DI2 OFF
DELAY
See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY. 0.0 s
All parameters
1812
1811
1809 1810
1812
1811
1809 1810FO
content
FO FO
FO
content

1819 DI3 OFF
DELAY
1821 DI4 OFF
DELAY
1823 DI5 OFF
DELAY
20 LIMITS Drive operation limits.
2003 MAX
CURRENT
Defines the allowed maximum motor current. 1.8 · I2N
0.0…1.8 · I2N A Current 1 = 0.1 A
2005 OVERVOLT
CTRL
Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the
intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise
to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage
from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the braking torque.
ENABLE
DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated 0
ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1
2006 UNDERVOLT
CTRL
Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the
intermediate DC link.
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the
undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the
motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower
limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load
will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC
link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the
motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-
through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as
a centrifuge or a fan. See section Power loss ride-through
on page 125.
ENABLE
(TIME)
DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated 0
ENABLE(TIME) Undervoltage control activated. The undervoltage control is
active for 500 ms.
1
ENABLE Undervoltage control activated. No operation time limit. 2
All parameters

2007 MINIMUM
FREQ
Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency.
A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed
range.
Note: MINIMUM FREQ < MAXIMUM FREQ.
0.0 Hz
-500.0…500.0 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2008 MAXIMUM
FREQ
Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor
2101 START
FUNCTION
Selects the motor starting method. AUTO
AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency. If
flying start is required, use selection SCAN START.
1
DC MAGN The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before
the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter
2103 DC MAGN TIME.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when
DC MAGN is selected.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed even if the motor
magnetization is not completed. Ensure always in
applications where a full break-away torque is essential,
that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
2
All parameters
2008
2007
0
f
2008 value is < 0
2007 value is > 0
f
2008
2007
0
-(2008)
-(2007)
t t
Allowed
frequency range
Allowed
frequency range
Allowed
frequency range

TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break-away
torque is required.
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before
the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter
2103 DC MAGN TIME.
Torque boost is applied at start. Torque boost is stopped
when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to
the reference value. See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST
CURR.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when
TORQ BOOST is selected.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed although the motor
magnetization is not completed. Ensure always in
applications where a full break-away torque is essential,
that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
4
SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start (starting to a rotating
machine). Based on frequency scanning (interval 2008
MAXIMUM FREQ…2007 MINIMUM FREQ) to identify the
frequency. If frequency identification fails, DC magnetization
is used (see selection DC MAGN).
6
SCAN +
BOOST
Combines scanning start (starting to a rotating machine)
and torque boost. See selections SCANSTART and TORQ
BOOST. If frequency identification fails, torque boost is
used.
7
2102 STOP
FUNCTION
Selects the motor stop function. COAST
COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor
coasts to a stop.
1
RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22
ACCEL/DECEL.
2
2103 DC MAGN
TIME
Defines the pre-magnetizing time. See parameter 2101
START FUNCTION. After the start command, the drive
automatically pre-magnetizes the motor the set time.
0.30 s
0.00…10.00 s Magnetizing time. Set this value long enough to allow full
motor magnetization. Too long time heats the motor
excessively.
1 = 0.01 s
2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC brake current. If parameter 2107 DC
BRAKE TIME is not zero, the DC brake current is injected to
the motor during the stop.
If parameter 2102 STOP COAST FUNCTION is set to
COAST, DC braking is applied after the start command is
removed. If parameter 2102 STOP COAST FUNCTION is
set to RAMP, DC braking is applied after the ramp.
30%
0…100% Value in percent of the motor nominal current (parameter
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR)
1 = 1%
2107 DC BRAKE
TIME
Defines the DC brake time. 0.0 s
0.0…250.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters

2108 START INHIBIT Enables the start inhibit function. Drive start is inhibited if:
• fault is reset.
• Run Enable signal activates while the start command is
active. See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE.
• control mode changes from local to remote.
• external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or
from EXT2 to EXT1.
OFF
OFF Disabled 0
ON Enabled 1
2109 EMERG STOP
SEL
Selects the source for the external emergency stop
command.
The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop
command is reset.
Note: The installation must include emergency stop devices
and any other safety equipment that may be needed.
Pressing STOP on the drive’s control panel does NOT:
• generate an emergency stop of the motor
• separate the drive from dangerous potential.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = stop along the emergency stop ramp.
See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 0 = emergency
stop command reset.
1
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI. 0 = stop along the emergency stop
ramp. See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 1 =
emergency stop command reset
-1
2110 TORQ BOOST
CURR
Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost.
See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.
100%
15…300% Value in percent 1 = 1%
All parameters

2112 ZERO SPEED
DELAY
Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function. The
function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick
restarting is essential. During the delay the drive knows
accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero Speed), the speed controller is switched
off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts
to standstill.
With Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero Speed), the zero speed delay function
activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed
controller live: The inverter modulates, motor is magnetized
and the drive is ready for a quick restart.
0.0 s
0.0…60.0 s Delay time. If parameter value is set to zero, zero speed
delay function is disabled.
1 = 0.1 s
2113 START DELAY Defines the start delay. After the conditions for start have
been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and
then starts the motor. Start delay can be used with all start
methods. If start delay is zero, the delay is disabled. During
the start delay, alarm START DELAY is shown.
0.00 s
0.0…60.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s
22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2
SEL
that selects between the two ramp pairs,
acceleration/deceleration pair 1 and 2.
Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202…2204.
Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205…2207.
DI5
NOT SEL Ramp pair 1 is used. 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp pair 2, 0 = ramp pair 1. 1
All parameters
t t
Speed controller
switched off: Motor
coasts to stop.
Speed controller
remains live. Motor is
decelerated to true 0
speed.
No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay
Speed Speed
Delay
Zero SpeedZero Speed

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1/2 selection,
ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10. The control
word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded
fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the control word bits, see
section DCU communication profile on page 283.
7
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp pair 2, 1 = ramp pair 1. -1
2202 ACCELER
TIME 1
Defines the acceleration time 1, ie the time required for the
speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 2208 MAXIMUM FREQ.
• If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
acceleration rate.
• If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference signal.
• If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive operating limits.
Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP
SHAPE 1 setting.
5.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2203 DECELER
TIME 1
Defines the deceleration time 1, ie the time required for the
speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2208
MAXIMUM FREQ to zero.
• If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference signal.
• If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration
rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.
• If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to
exceed drive operating limits.
If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, note that the ACS310 cannot be equipped with
a brake resistor.
Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204
RAMP SHAPE 1 setting.
5.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters

2204 RAMP SHAPE
1
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 1.
The function is deactivated during emergency stop.
LINEAR
0.0 = LINEAR
0.1…1000.0 s
0.0: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.1 … 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for
conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where
a smooth transition is required when changing from one
speed to another. The S-curve consists of symmetrical
curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in
between.
1 = 0.1 s
2205 ACCELER
TIME 2
Defines the acceleration time 2, ie the time required for the
speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.
60.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2206 DECELER
TIME 2
Defines the deceleration time 2, ie the time required for the
speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008
MAXIMUM FREQ to zero.
See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1.
60.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2207 RAMP SHAPE
2
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 2.
The function is deactivated during emergency stop.
LINEAR
0.0 = LINEAR
0.1…1000.0 s
See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1. 1 = 0.1 s
2208 EMERG DEC
TIME
Defines the time within the drive is stopped if an emergency
stop is activated. See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL.
1.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero. NOT SEL
NOT SEL Not selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp input is forced to zero. Ramp
output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time.
1
All parameters
Linear ramp: Par. 2204 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
Par. 2204 > 0 s
A rule of thumb:
A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the
acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
t
Par. 2204Par. 2202
Max
Speed

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to
zero, ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (with
ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6). The control
word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus
adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For
the control word bits, see sections DCU communication
profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile
on page 278.
7
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp input is forced to zero.
Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp
time.
-1
25 CRITICAL
SPEEDS
Speed (output frequency) bands within which the drive is not
allowed to operate.
2501 CRIT SPEED
SEL
Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function. The
critical speed function avoids specific output frequency
ranges.
Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz
and 46 to 52 Hz. To make the drive to jump over the
vibration frequency ranges:
• Activate the critical speeds function.
• Set the critical frequency ranges as in the figure below.
OFF
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active 1
2502 CRIT SPEED 1
LO
Defines the minimum limit for critical output frequency range
1
0.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Limit in Hz. The value cannot be above the maximum
(parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI).
1 = 0.1 Hz
2503 CRIT SPEED 1
HI
Defines the maximum limit for critical output frequency
range 1
0.0 Hz
All parameters
18
23
46
52
1 Par. 2502 = 18 Hz
2 Par. 2503 = 23 Hz
3 Par. 2504 = 46 Hz
4 Par. 2505 = 52 Hz
1 2 3 4
foutput (Hz)
freference (Hz)

0.0…500.0 Hz Limit in Hz. The value cannot be below the minimum
(parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO).
1 = 0.1 Hz
2504 CRIT SPEED 2
LO
See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz See parameter 2502. 1 = 0.1 Hz
2505 CRIT SPEED 2
HI
See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz
2506 CRIT SPEED 3
LO
See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz
2507 CRIT SPEED 3
HI
See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz
26 MOTOR
CONTROL
Motor control variables
2603 IR COMP
VOLT
Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed (IR
compensation). The function is useful in applications with
high break-away torque when vector control cannot be
applied.
To prevent overheating, set IR compensation voltage as low
as possible.
The figure below illustrates the IR compensation.
Type
dependent
0.0…100.0 V Voltage boost 1 = 0.1 V
2604 IR COMP
FREQ
Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V.
See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT.
Note: If parameter 2605 U/F RATIO is set to USER
DEFINED, this parameter is not active. The IR
compensation frequency is set by parameter 2610 USER
DEFINED U1.
80%
0…100% Value in percent of the motor frequency 1 = 1%
All parameters
A
B
A = IR compensated
B = No compensation
Typical IR compensation values:
PN (kW) 0.37 0.75 2.2 4.0 7.5
200…240 V units
IR comp (V) 8.4 7.7 5.6 8.4 N/A
380…480 V units
IR comp (V) 14 14 5.6 8.4 7
2603
2604
Motor
voltage
f (Hz)

2605 U/F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency (U/f) ratio below the field
weakening point.
SQUARE
D
LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications. 1
SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications.
With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most
operating frequencies.
2
USER
DEFINED
Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610…2618. See
section Custom U/f ratio on page 128.
3
2606 SWITCHING
FREQ
Defines the switching frequency of the drive. Higher
switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise. See
also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section
Switching frequency derating on page 309.
4 kHz
4 kHz 1 = 1 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
2607 SWITCH FREQ
CTRL
Activates the switching frequency control. When active, the
selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited
when the drive internal temperature increases. See the
figure below. This function allows the highest possible
switching frequency at a specific operation point.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise,
but higher internal losses.
ON
ON Active 1
ON (LOAD) Switching frequency can adapt to loading instead of limiting
the output current. This allows maximum loading with all
switching frequency selections. The drive automatically
decreases the actual switching frequency if loading is too
high for the selected switching frequency.
2
All parameters
* Temperature depends on the drive output frequency.
16 kHz
4 kHz
Drive
temperature
fsw limit
80…100 °C * 100…120 °C *
T

2608 SLIP COMP
RATIO
Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation
control. 100% means full slip compensation, 0% means no
slip compensation. Other values can be used if a static
speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation.
Example: 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the
drive. Despite the full slip compensation (SLIP COMP
RATIO = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from
the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz. The static
speed error is 35 Hz - 34 Hz = 1 Hz. To compensate the
error, the slip gain should be increased.
0%
0…200% Slip gain 1 = 1%
2609 NOISE
SMOOTHING
Enables the noise smoothing function. Noise smoothing
distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of
frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in
lower peak noise intensity. A random component with an
average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by
parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ.
Note: Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606
SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz.
DISABLE
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
2610 USER
DEFINED U1
Defines the first voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the
frequency defined by parameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1.
See section Custom U/f ratio on page 128.
19% of
UN
0…120% of UN V Voltage 1 = 1 V
2611 USER
DEFINED F1
Defines the first frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 10.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2612 USER
DEFINED U2
Defines the second voltage point of the custom U/f curve at
the frequency defined by parameter 2613 USER DEFINED
F2. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 128.
38% of
UN
2613 USER
DEFINED F2
Defines the second frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 20.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2614 USER
DEFINED U3
Defines the third voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the
frequency defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3.
See section Custom U/f ratio on page 128.
47.5% of
UN
2615 USER
DEFINED F3
Defines the third frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 25.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2616 USER
DEFINED U4
Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U/f curve at
the frequency defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED
F4. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 128.
76% of
UN
2617 USER
DEFINED F4
Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 40.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
All parameters

2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U/f curve when frequency is equal
to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency (9907 MOTOR
NOM FREQ). See section Custom U/f ratio on page 128.
95% of
UN
2619 DC
STABILIZER
Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC
stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in
the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply
network. In case of voltage variation, the drive tunes the
frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and
therefore the load torque oscillation.
DISABLE
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
29 MAINTENANCE
TRIG
Maintenance triggers
2901 COOLING FAN
TRIG
Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time
counter. Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING
FAN ACT value.
0.0 kh
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is
disabled.
1 = 0.1 kh
2902 COOLING FAN
ACT
Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter.
When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set
to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual
value of the counter exceeds the value defined by
parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is displayed on the
panel.
0.0 kh
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh
2903 REVOLUTION
TRIG
Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter.
Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT
value.
0 Mrev
0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. If parameter value is set to zero, the
trigger is disabled.
1 = 1
Mrev
2904 REVOLUTION
ACT
Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter.
When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to
a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value
of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter
2903, a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel.
0 Mrev
0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. Parameter is reset by setting it to
zero.
1 = 1
Mrev
2905 RUN TIME
TRIG
Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter. Value
is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value.
0.0 kh
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is
disabled.
1 = 0.1 kh
2906 RUN TIME
ACT
Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter.
When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a
non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value of
the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905, a
maintenance notice is displayed on the panel.
0.0 kh
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh
2907 USER MWh
TRIG
Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption
counter. Value is compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh
ACT value.
0.0 MWh
All parameters

0.0…6553.5
MWh
Megawatt hours. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger
is disabled.
1 = 0.1
MWh
2908 USER MWh
ACT
Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption
counter. When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been
set to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual
value of the counter exceeds the value defined by
parameter 2907, a maintenance notice is displayed on the
panel.
0.0 MWh
0.0…6553.5
MWh
Megawatt hours. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1
MWh
30 FAULT
FUNCTIONS
Programmable protection functions
3001 AI<MIN
FUNCTION
Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal
falls below the set minimum limit.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Protection is inactive. 0
FAULT The drive trips on fault AI1/AI2 LOSS and the motor coasts
to stop. Fault limit is defined by parameter 3021/3022
AI1/AI2 FAULT LIMIT.
1
CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm AI1/AI2 LOSS and sets the
speed to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST
SPEED 7. Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021/3022
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case the analog input signal is lost.
2
LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm AI1/AI2 LOSS and freezes the
speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is
determined by the average speed over the previous 10
seconds. Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021/3022
operation in case the analog input signal is lost.
3
3002 PANEL COMM
ERR
Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel
communication break.
FAULT
FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS and the motor coasts to
stop.
1
CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and sets the
speed to the speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST
SPEED 7.
operation in case of a panel communication break.
2
LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and freezes the
speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is
determined by the average speed over the previous 10
seconds.
operation in case of a panel communication break.
3
3003 EXTERNAL
FAULT 1
Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal. NOT SEL
All parameters

DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1. 1: Fault
trip (EXT FAULT 1). Motor coasts to stop. 0: No external
fault.
1
DI1(INV) External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1. 0:
Fault trip (EXT FAULT 1). Motor coasts to stop. 1: No
external fault.
-1
3004 EXTERNAL
FAULT 2
Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal. NOT SEL
See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
3005 MOT THERM
PROT
Selects how the drive reacts when the motor
overtemperature is detected.
FAULT
FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the
temperature exceeds 110 °C, and the motor coasts to a
stop.
1
ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP when the motor
temperature exceeds 90 °C.
2
3006 MOT THERM
TIME
Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal
model, ie the time within the motor temperature has reached
63% of the nominal temperature with steady load.
For thermal protection according to UL requirements for
NEMA class motors, use the rule of thumb: Motor thermal
time = 35 · t6. t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor
manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six
times its rated current.
Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class
20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
500 s
256…9999 s Time constant 1 = 1 s
All parameters
}
Motor load
Temp. rise
100%
63%
Par. 3006
t
t

3007 MOT LOAD
CURVE
Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008
ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ.
With the default value 100%, motor overload protection is
functioning when the constant current exceeds 127% of the
parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value.
The default overloadability is at the same level as what
motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 °C (86 °F)
ambient temperature and below 1000 m (3300 ft) altitude.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F) or
the installation altitude is over 1000 m (3300 ft), decrease
the parameter 3007 value according to the motor
manufacturer’s recommendation.
Example: If the constant protection level needs to be 115%
of the motor nominal current, set parameter 3007 value to
91% (= 115/127·100%).
100%
50.…150% Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor
current
1 = 1%
3008 ZERO SPEED
LOAD
Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT
LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ.
70%
25.…150% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of
the nominal motor current
1 = 1%
All parameters
100 =
127%
150
50
Par. 3007
Par. 3008
f
Output current relative (%) to
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
Par. 3009

3009 BREAK POINT
FREQ
Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT
LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD.
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters
3006…3008 have default values.
35 Hz
1…250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 1 = 1 Hz
3010 STALL
FUNCTION
Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The
protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall
region (see the figure below) longer than the time set by
parameter 3012 STALL TIME.
NOT SEL
FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL and the motor coast
to a stop.
1
ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL. 2
3011 STALL
FREQUENCY
Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See
parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION.
20.0 Hz
All parameters
60 s
3.5
IO = Output current
IN = Nominal motor current
fO = Output frequency
fBRK = Break point frequency
A = Trip time
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.0 1.2
IO/IN
fO/fBRK
90 s
180 s
300 s
600 s
0.6
180 s
A
∞
User defined limit =
2003 MAX CURRENT
Current (A)
0.95 · User defined limit
Stall region
Par. 3011
f

0.5…50.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 3010
STALL FUNCTION.
20 s
10…400 s Time 1 = 1 s
3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth (ground) fault is
detected in the motor or the motor cable.
Note: Changing this parameter setting is not recommended.
ENABLE
DISABLE No action 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT. 1
3018 COMM FAULT
FUNC
Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication
break. The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM
FAULT TIME.
NOT SEL
FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR
and coasts to stops.
1
CONST SP 7 Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM
and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 1208
CONST SPEED 7.
operation in case of a communication break.
2
LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM
and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating
at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the
previous 10 seconds.
operation in case of a communication break.
3
3019 COMM FAULT
TIME
Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break
supervision. See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
3.0 s
0.0…600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
3021 AI1 FAULT
LIMIT
Defines a fault level for analog input AI1. If parameter 3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT, the drive trips on fault
AI1 LOSS, when the analog input signal falls below the set
level.
Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter
1301 MINIMUM AI1.
0.1%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range 1 = 0.1%
3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT
Defines a fault level for analog input AI2. If parameter 3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT, the drive trips on fault
AI2 LOSS, when the analog input signal falls below the set
level.
Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter
1304 MINIMUM AI2.
0.1%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range 1 = 0.1%
3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and
motor cable connection is detected (ie the input power cable
is connected to the motor connection of the drive).
Note: Changing this parameter setting is not recommended
in normal use. The protection is to be disabled only with
corner-grounded delta power systems and very long cables.
ENABLE
All parameters

DISABLE No action 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING. 1
31 AUTOMATIC
RESET
Automatic fault reset. Automatic resets are possible only for
certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is
activated for that fault type.
3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive
performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL
TIME.
If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number
(within the trial time), the drive prevents additional automatic
resets and remains stopped. The drive must be reset from
control panel or from a source selected by parameter 1604
FAULT RESET SEL.
Example: Three faults have occurred during the trial time
defined by parameter 3102. Last fault is reset only if the
number defined by parameter 3101 is 3 or more.
0
0…5 Number of the automatic resets 1 = 1
3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See
parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS.
30.0 s
1.0…600.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 3101 NR OF
TRIALS. If delay time is set to zero, the drive resets
immediately.
0.0 s
0.0…120.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
3104 AR
OVERCURRE
NT
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the
overcurrent fault. Automatically resets the fault
(OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by parameter 3103
DELAY TIME.
DISABLE
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
3105 AR
OVERVOLTAG
E
intermediate link overvoltage fault. Automatically resets the
fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by parameter
3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
3106 AR
UNDERVOLTA
GE
intermediate link undervoltage fault. Automatically resets
the fault (DC UNDERVOLTAGE) after the delay set by
parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
All parameters
X X X
t
Trial time
X = Automatic reset

3107 AR AI<MIN Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for fault AI<MIN
(analog input signal under the allowed minimum level).
Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by
parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long
stop if the analog input signal is restored. Ensure that
the use of this feature will not cause danger.
1
3108 AR EXTERNAL
FLT
EXTERNAL FAULT 1/2. Automatically resets the fault after
the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
32 SUPERVISION Signal supervision. Supervision status can be monitored
with relay or transistor output. See parameter groups 14
RELAY OUTPUTS and 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT.
3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM
Selects the first supervised signal. Supervision limits are
defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203
SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
Example 1: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO < 3203 SUPERV 1
LIM HI
Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
OVER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected
with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit
defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI. The relay remains
active until the supervised value drops below the low limit
defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO.
Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV 1
UNDER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected
with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision
limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO. The relay remains
active until the supervised value rises above the high limit
defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
103
All parameters
t
t
t
HI par. 3203
Value of supervised parameter
LO par. 3202
Energized (1)
Energized (1)
0
0
Case A
Case B

Example 2: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO > 3203 SUPERV 1
LIM HI
The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until
the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202
SUPERV 1 LIM LO, making it the active limit. The new limit
remains active until the supervised signal drops below the
lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI, making it the active
limit.
Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
OVER. Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal
exceeds the active limit.
Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
UNDER. Relay is de-energized whenever the supervised
signal drops below the active limit.
0, x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 =
0102 SPEED. 0 = not selected.
1 = 1
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM
LO
Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected
by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is below the limit.
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3201 setting. -
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM
HI
Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected
up if the value is above the limit.
-
3204 SUPERV 2
PARAM
Selects the second supervised signal. Supervision limits are
SUPERV 2 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM.
104
0102 SPEED.
1 = 1
3205 SUPERV 2 LIM
LO
Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal
selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM.
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit.
-
All parameters
t
t
t
HI par. 3203
Value of supervised parameter
LO par. 3202
Energized (1)
Energized (1)
0
0
Case A
Case B
Active limit

3206 SUPERV 2 LIM
HI
Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal
selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM.
Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit.
-
3207 SUPERV 3
PARAM
Selects the third supervised signal. Supervision limits are
SUPERV 3 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM.
105
0102 SPEED.
1 = 1
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM
LO
Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected
up if the value is below the limit.
-
3209 SUPERV 3 LIM
HI
Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected
up if the value is above the limit.
-
33 INFORMATION Firmware package version, test date etc.
3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package.
0000…FFFF
hex
Eg 241A hex
3302 LOADING
PACKAGE
Displays the version of the loading package. type
dependent
2101…21FF
hex
2101 hex = ACS310-0x (Eur Industrial Drive)
2102 hex = ACS310-0x (US Industrial Drive)
3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date. 00.00
Date value in format YY.WW (year, week)
3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings. 0000 hex
0000…FFFF
hex
Value in format XXXY hex:
XXX = Nominal current of the drive in Amperes. An “A”
indicates decimal point. For example if XXX is 9A7, nominal
current is 9.7 A.
Y = Nominal voltage of the drive:
2 = 3-phase 200…240 V
4 = 3-phase 380…480 V
3305 PARAMETER
TABLE
Displays the version of the parameter table used in the
drive.
0000…FFFF
hex
Eg 400E hex
All parameters

34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of actual signals to be displayed on the panel
3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM
Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel
in display mode.
103
0, 101…178 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 =
0102 SPEED. If value is set to 0, no signal is selected.
1 = 1
3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM.
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404
OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT.
-
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See the figure for
parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
3404 OUTPUT1DSP
FORM
Defines the format for the displayed signal (selected by
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM).
DIRECT
+/-0 Signed/Unsigned value. Unit is selected by parameter 3405
OUTPUT 1 UNIT.
Example: PI (3.14159)
0
+/-0.0 1
+/-0.00 2
+/-0.000 3
+0 4
+0.0 5
+0.00 6
+0.000 7
All parameters
Assistant panel
0137
0138
0139
3404 3405
DIR MENU00:00
LOC 15.0Hz
15 0 Hz.
3 7 A.
17 3 %.
3402
Source
value
Display
value
3407
3406
3403
3404 value Display Range
+/-0 + 3 -32768…+32767
+/-0.0 + 3.1
+/-0.00 + 3.14
+/-0.000 + 3.142
+0 3 0…65535
+0.0 3.1
+0.00 3.14
+0.000 3.142

BAR METER Bar graph 8
DIRECT Direct value. Decimal point location and units of measure
are identical to the source signal.
Note: Parameters 3402, 3403 and 3405…3407 are not
effective.
9
3405 OUTPUT1
UNIT
Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by
Note: Unit selection does not convert values.
Hz
NO UNIT No unit selected 0
A ampere 1
V volt 2
Hz hertz 3
% percent 4
s second 5
h hour 6
rpm revolutions per minute 7
kh kilohour 8
°C celsius 9
lb ft pounds per foot 10
mA milliampere 11
mV millivolt 12
kW kilowatt 13
W watt 14
kWh kilowatt hour 15
°F fahrenheit 16
hp horsepower 17
MWh megawatt hour 18
m/s meters per second 19
m3/h cubic meters per hour 20
dm3/s cubic decimeters per second 21
bar bar 22
kPa kilopascal 23
GPM gallons per minute 24
PSI pounds per square inch 25
CFM cubic feet per minute 26
ft foot 27
MGD millions of gallons per day 28
inHg inches of mercury 29
FPM feet per minute 30
kb/s kilobytes per second 31
All parameters

kHz kilohertz 32
ohm ohm 33
ppm pulses per minute 34
pps pulses per second 35
l/s liters per second 36
l/min liters per minute 37
l/h liters per hour 38
m3/s cubic meters per second 39
m3/m cubic meters per minute 40
kg/s kilograms per second 41
kg/m kilograms per minute 42
kg/h kilograms per hour 43
mbar millibar 44
Pa pascal 45
GPS gallons per second 46
gal/s gallons per second 47
gal/m gallons per minute 48
gal/h gallons per hour 49
ft3/s cubic feet per second 50
ft3/m cubic feet per minute 51
ft3/h cubic feet per hour 52
lb/s pounds per second 53
lb/m pounds per minute 54
lb/h pounds per hour 55
FPS feet per second 56
ft/s feet per second 57
inH2O inches of water 58
in wg inches of water gauge 59
ft wg feet on water gauge 60
lbsi pounds per squared inch 61
ms millisecond 62
Mrev millions of revolutions 63
d days 64
inWC inches of water column 65
m/min meters per minute 66
Nm Newton meter 67
Km3/h thousand cubic meters per hour 68
%ref reference in percentage 117
%act actual value in percentage 118
%dev deviation in percentage 119
All parameters

% LD load in percentage 120
% SP set point in percentage 121
%FBK feedback in percentage 122
Iout output current (in percentage) 123
Vout output voltage 124
Fout output frequency 125
Tout output torque 126
Vdc DC voltage 127
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See parameter 3402
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
3407 OUTPUT1
MAX
Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
3408 SIGNAL2
PARAM
Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control
panel in display mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM.
104
1 = 1
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
3411 OUTPUT2 DSP
FORM
Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by
DIRECT
See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. -
3412 OUTPUT2
UNIT
-
See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. -
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
3414 OUTPUT2
MAX
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
All parameters

3415 SIGNAL3
PARAM
Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel
in display mode. See par 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM.
105
1 = 1
parameter 3415. See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL 3
PARAM setting.
-
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3
PARAM setting.
-
3418 OUTPUT3DSP
FORM
Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by
DIRECT
See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. -
3419 OUTPUT3
UNIT
-
See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. -
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3
PARAM setting.
-
3421 OUTPUT3
MAX
SIGNAL1 MIN.
-
35 MOTOR TEMP
MEAS
Motor temperature measurement. See section Motor
temperature measurement through the standard I/O on
page 139.
3501 SENSOR
TYPE
Activates the motor temperature measurement function and
selects the sensor type. See also parameter group 15
ANALOG OUTPUTS.
NONE
NONE The function is inactive. 0
1 x PT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with
one Pt 100 sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current
through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the
motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the
sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the
voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it to
degrees centigrade.
1
2 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two
Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100.
2
3 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three
Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100.
3
All parameters

PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using
PTC sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current
through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases
sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC
reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the
resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the
voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it into
ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor
resistance values as a function of the motor operating
temperature.
4
THERM(0) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using
a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive via a
normally closed thermistor relay connected to a digital input.
0 = motor overtemperature.
5
THERM(1) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using
a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive via a
normally open thermistor relay connected to a digital input.
1 = motor overtemperature.
6
3502 INPUT
SELECTION
Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement
signal.
AI1
AI1 Analog input AI1. Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is
selected for the temperature measurement.
1
AI2 Analog input AI2. Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is
selected for the temperature measurement
2
DI1 Digital input DI1. Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR
TYPE value is set to THERMI(0)/(1).
3
4
5
6
All parameters
100
550
1330
4000
ohm
T
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0…1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm

7
3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement.
Alarm MOTOR TEMP indication is given when the limit is
exceeded. When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is
set to THERMI(0)/(1): 1 = alarm.
0
x…x Alarm limit -
3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature
measurement. The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP
when the limit is exceeded. When parameter 3501
SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI(0)/(1): 1 = fault.
0
x…x Fault limit -
3505 AO
EXCITATION
Enables current feed from analog output AO. Parameter
setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS
settings.
With PTC the output current is 1.6 mA.
With Pt 100 the output current is 9.1 mA.
DISABLE
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS
Time periods 1 to 4 and booster signal. See section Timed
functions on page 141.
3601 TIMERS
ENABLE
Selects the source for the timed function enable signal. NOT SEL
NOT SEL Timed function is not selected. 0
DI1 Digital input DI. Timed function enable on the rising edge of
DI1.
1
ACTIVE Timed function is always enabled. 7
DI1 CMODE Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1. Timed
function is in continuous mode, in which the start date can
be different from the stop date.
11
DI2 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE. 12
CONT MODE Timed function enabled in continuous mode, in which the
start date can be different from the stop date.
17
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. Timed function enable on the
falling edge of DI1.
-1
All parameters

DI1(INV) CM Timed function enable on the falling edge of DI1. Timed
function is in continuous mode, in which the start date can
be different from the stop date.
-11
DI2(INV) CM See selection DI1(INV) CM. -12
3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1. The time can be changed in 2
second steps.
00:00:00
00:00:00…
23:59:58
hours:minutes:seconds.
Example: If parameter value is set to 07:00:00, the timed
function is activated at 7:00 (7 a.m).
3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1. The time can be changed in 2
second steps.
00:00:00
00:00:00…
23:59:58
hours:minutes:seconds.
Example: If parameter value is set to 18:00:00, the timed
function is deactivated at 18:00 (6 p.m).
3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1. MONDAY
MONDAY
Example: If parameter value is set to MONDAY, timed
function 1 is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00).
1
TUESDAY 2
WEDNESDAY 3
THURSDAY 4
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1. MONDAY
See parameter
3604.
If parameter is set to FRIDAY, timed function 1 is
deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).
3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1.
See parameter 3602 START TIME 1.
3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.
See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.
3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1.
See parameter 3604 START DAY 1.
3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1.
See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1.
All parameters

3622 BOOSTER
SEL
Selects the source for the booster activation signal. NOT SEL
NOT SEL No booster activation signal 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1
3623 BOOSTER
TIME
Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated
after the booster activation signal is switched off.
00:00:00
00:00:00…
23:59:58
hours:minutes:seconds
Example: If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1
and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01:30:00, the booster is
active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is
deactivated.
3626 TIMED FUNC 1
SRC
Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SRC. Timed
function can consist of 0…4 time periods and a booster.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No time periods selected 0
T1 Time period 1 1
T2 Time period 2 2
T1+T2 Time periods 1 and 2 3
T3 Time period 3 4
All parameters
Booster active
Booster time
DI

T1+T2+T3 Time periods 1, 2 and 3 7
T4 Time period 4 8
T1+T2+T3+T4 Time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 15
BOOSTER Booster 16
T1+B Booster and time period 1 17
T1+T2+B Booster and time periods 1 and 2 19
T1+T2+T3+B Booster and time periods 1, 2 and 3 23
T1+2+3+4+B Booster and time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 31
3627 TIMED FUNC 2
SRC
See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC.
3628 TIMED FUNC 3
SRC
3629 TIMED FUNC 4
SRC
All parameters

37 USER LOAD
CURVE
Defines supervision of a user adjustable load curve (motor
torque as a function of frequency). The curve is defined by
five points. See section User load curve on page 143.
3701 USER LOAD C
MODE
Defines supervision mode for the user adjustable load
curve.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Supervision not active 0
UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload
curve
1
OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve 2
BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload
curve or exceeding the overload curve
3
3702 USER LOAD C
FUNC
Defines the action wanted during load supervision FAULT
FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701
USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time
set by 3703 USER LOAD C MODE.
1
ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701
USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the
time set by 3703 USER LOAD C MODE.
2
3703 USER LOAD C
TIME
Defines the time limit for generating a fault. Half of this time
is used as the limit for generating an alarm.
20 s
10…400 s Time 1 = 1 s
3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition
point. Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2.
5 Hz
0…500 Hz Frequency 1 = 1 Hz
3705 LOAD TORQ
LOW 1
Defines the torque value of the first underload curve
definition point. Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 1.
10%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3706 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 1
Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition
point
300%
All parameters
Overload area
Underload area
Allowed operating area
3706
Motor torque (%)
Output frequency (Hz)
3715
3714
3718
3717
3709
3712
3705
3711
3708
3704 3707 3710 3713 3716

0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve
definition point. Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3.
25 Hz
3708 LOAD TORQ
LOW 2
Defines the torque value of the second underload curve
HIGH 2.
15%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3709 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 2
Defines the torque value of the second overload curve
definition point
300%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition
point. Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4.
43 Hz
3711 LOAD TORQ
LOW 3
Defines the torque value of the third underload curve
HIGH 3.
25%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3712 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 3
Defines the torque value of the third overload curve
definition point
300%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve
definition point. Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5.
50 Hz
3714 LOAD TORQ
LOW 4
Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve
HIGH 4.
30%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3715 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 4
Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve
definition point
300%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition
point
500 Hz
3717 LOAD TORQ
LOW 5
Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve
HIGH 5.
30%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3718 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 5
Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition
point
300%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
40 PROCESS PID
SET 1
Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 1. See section
PID control on page 133.
4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller. Great gain
may cause speed oscillation.
1.0
All parameters

0.1…100.0 Gain. When value is set to 0.1, the PID controller output
changes one-tenth as much as the error value. When value
is set to 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred
times as much as the error value.
1 = 0.1
4002 INTEGRATION
TIME
Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller.
The integration time defines the rate at which the controller
output changes when the error value is constant. The
shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error
value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the
control unstable.
60.0 s
0.0 = NOT SEL
0.1…3600.0 s
Integration time. If parameter value is set to zero, integration
(I-part of the PID controller) is disabled.
1 = 0.1 s
All parameters
t
A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with gain = 1
D = Controller output with gain = 10
D (4001 = 10)
C (4001 = 1)
B
A
4002

4003 DERIVATION
TIME
Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller.
Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error
value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the
speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI
controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for
disturbances.
The derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. Filter time
constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
0.0 s
0.0…10.0 s Derivation time. If parameter value is set to zero, the
derivative part of the PID controller is disabled.
1 = 0.1 s
4004 PID DERIV
FILTER
Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the
process PID controller. Increasing the filter time smooths
the derivative and reduces noise.
1.0 s
0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant. If parameter value is set to zero, the
derivative filter is disabled.
1 = 0.1 s
4005 ERROR
VALUE INV
Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and
drive speed.
NO
NO Normal: A decrease in feedback signal increases drive
speed. Error = Ref - Fbk
0
YES Inverted: A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive
speed. Error = Fbk - Ref
1
4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values. %
0…68 See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections.
4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for the display parameter
selected by parameter 4006 UNITS.
1
All parameters
t
t
100%
0%
Error Process error value
D-part of controller outputPID output
4001
Gain
4003

0…4 Example: PI (3.141593) 1 = 1
4008 0% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100% VALUE the
scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
0
x…x Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by
parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4009 100% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0% VALUE the
scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
100
4010 SET POINT
SEL
Selects the source for the process PID controller reference
signal.
AI1
KEYPAD Control panel 0
COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 8
COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input
page 271.
9
COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input
page 271.
10
DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4:
zero. The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from
LOC to REM.
11
All parameters
4007 value Entry Display
0 00003 3
1 00031 3.1
2 00314 3.14
3 03142 3.142
4 31416 3.1416
4009
Units (4006)
Scale (4007)
4008
-1000%
+1000%
Internal
scale (%)100%0%

DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4:
Reference decrease. The program stores the active
reference (not reset by a stop command). The reference is
not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to
EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM.
12
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
14
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%)
15
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
16
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation:
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
17
INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL
SETPNT, 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2, 4037 INTERNAL
SETPNT3 or 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4. See also
parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL.
19
DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31
4011 INTERNAL
SETPNT
Selects a constant value as process PID controller
reference, when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is
set to INTERNAL.
40
4012 SETPOINT
MIN
Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference
signal source. See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL
0.0%
-500.0…500.0% Value in percent.
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the PID reference
source (value of parameter 4010 is AI1). The reference
minimum and maximum correspond the 1301 MINIMUM AI1
and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows:
1 = 0.1%
4013 SETPOINT
MAX
Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference
signal source. See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and
4012 SETPOINT MIN.
100.0%
-500.0…500.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value (feedback signal) for the
process PID controller: The sources for the variables ACT1
and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4016 ACT1
INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT.
ACT1
ACT1 ACT1 1
All parameters
4013
(MAX)
4012
(MIN)
1301 1302 1301 1302AI1 (%)
Ref Ref
AI1 (%)
4012
(MIN)
4013
(MAX)
MAX > MIN MIN > MAX

ACT1-ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2 2
ACT1+ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3
ACT1*ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4
ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5
MIN(ACT1,2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6
MAX(ACT1,2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7
sqrt(ACT1-2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8
sqA1+sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of
ACT2
9
sqrt(ACT1) Square root of ACT1 10
COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 value 11
COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 value 12
AVE(ACT1,2) Average of ACT1 and ACT2 13
4015 FBK
MULTIPLIER
Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by
parameter 4014 FBK SEL. Parameter is used mainly in
applications where feedback value is calculated from a
other variable (eg flow from pressure difference).
0.000
-32.768…
32.767
Multiplier. If parameter value is set to zero, no multiplier is
used.
1 = 0.001
4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1). See also
parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
AI2
AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 1
AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 2
CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 3
TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 4
POWER Uses power for ACT1 5
COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 6
COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 7
4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2. See also
parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM.
AI2
See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT.
All parameters

4018 ACT1
MINIMUM
Sets the minimum value for ACT1.
Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1
(defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT). For parameter
4016 values 6 (COMM ACT 1) and 7 (COMM ACT 2)
scaling is not done.
A = Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 minimum > ACT1
maximum)
0%
-1000…1000% Value in percent 1 = 1%
4019 ACT1
MAXIMUM
Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an
analog input is selected as a source for ACT1. See
parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT. The minimum (4018 ACT1
MINIMUM) and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the
voltage/current signal received from the measuring device is
converted to a percentage value used by the process PID
controller.
See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
100%
-1000…1000% Value in percent 1 = 1%
4020 ACT2
MINIMUM
See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 0%
-1000…1000% See parameter 4018. 1 = 1%
4021 ACT2
MAXIMUM
See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM. 100%
-1000…1000% See parameter 4019. 1 = 1%
4022 SLEEP
SELECTION
Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the
activation input. See section Sleep function for the process
PID (PID1) control on page 137.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No sleep function selected 0
DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input
DI1.1 = activation, 0 = deactivation.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID
SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP DEV are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP
DELAY and 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY are effective.
1
All parameters
Par
4016
Source Source min. Source max.
1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM AI1
2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2
3 Current 0 2 · nominal current
4 Torque -2 · nominal torque 2 · nominal torque
5 Power -2 · nominal power 2 · nominal power
4019
4018
Source min.
4018
4019
ACT1 (%) ACT1 (%)
A
B
Source max.
Source signal
Source min. Source max.
Source signal

INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by
parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP
DEV.
7
SUPRV1
OVER
The function is activated when parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM stays over the high limit defined by parameter 3203
SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
9
SUPRV2
OVER
SUPRV3
OVER
DI1(INV) The function is activated/deactivated through inverted digital
input DI1. 1 = deactivation, 0 = activation.
-1
SUPRV1
UNDER
The function is activated when parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM stays below the low limit defined by parameter 3202
SUPERV 1 LIM LO.
-9
SUPRV2
UNDER
See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. -10
SUPRV3
UNDER
See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. -11
All parameters

4023 PID SLEEP
LEVEL
Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor
speed is below a set level (4023) longer than the sleep
delay (4024), the drive shifts to the sleeping mode: The
motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm
message PID SLEEP.
Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to
INTERNAL.
0.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Sleep start level 1 = 0.1 Hz
4024 PID SLEEP
DELAY
Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter
4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. When the motor speed falls below
the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor speed
exceeds the sleep level, the counter is reset.
60.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep start delay 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters
Wake-up level
deviation (4025)
t < tsd
Output
frequency
Selected process actual
value
Stop
tsd = Sleep delay
(4024)
Sleep level
(4023)
Start
Wake-up delay
(4026)
tsd
Reference
t
Sleep boost step
(4031)
Control
panel:
PID SLEEP
Sleep boost time (4030)
t
t

4025 WAKE-UP DEV Defines the wake-up deviation for the sleep function. The
drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from
the PID reference value exceeds the set wake-up deviation
(4025) longer than the wake-up delay (4026). Wake-up level
depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings.
If parameter 4005 is set 0:
Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) - Wake-up deviation
(4025).
If parameter 4005 is set to 1:
Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) + Wake-up deviation
(4025)
See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
0
parameters 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT
SCALE.
4026 WAKE-UP
DELAY
Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See
parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
0.50 s
0.00…60.00 s Wake-up delay 1 = 0.01 s
4027 PID 1 PARAM
SET
that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2.
PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101…4126.
SET1
SET 1 PID SET 1 is active. 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = PID SET 2, 0 = PID SET 1. 1
SET 2 PID SET 2 is active. 7
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1/2 control. Timed function 1 inactive = PID
SET 1, timed function 1 active = PID SET 2. See parameter
group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
8
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = PID SET 2, 1 = PID SET 1. -1
All parameters
Wake-up level
when 4005 = 1
Wake-up level
when 4005 = 0
t
4025
4025
PID reference

4028 PID OUT MIN Defines the minimum value of PID output. -100.0%
-500.0…500.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4029 PID OUT MAX Defines the maximum value of PID output. 100.0%
-500.0…500.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4030 SLEEPBOOST
TIME
Defines the boost time for the sleep boost step. See
parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP.
0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep boost time 1 = 0.1 s
4031 SLEEPBOOST
STEP
When the drive is entering sleep mode, the reference (PID
setpoint) is increased by this percentage for the time
defined by parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Sleep boost step 1 = 0.1%
4032 PID REF ACC
TIME
Defines the time for the reference (PID setpoint) increase
from 0 to 100%.
Note: Parameters 4032…4036 are active even if the
process PID set 2 (41 PROCESS PID SET 2) is used.
0.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Acceleration time 1 = 0.1 s
4033 PID REF DEC
TIME
Defines the time for the reference (PID setpoint) decrease
from 100 to 0%
0.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s Deceleration time 1 = 0.1 s
4034 PID REF
FREEZE
Freezes the input (reference, PID setpoint) of the process
PID controller
NOT SEL
DI1 Reference is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1. 1
DI1(INV) Reference is frozen on the falling edge of digital input DI1. -1
4035 PID OUT
FREEZE
Freezes the output of the process PID controller. NOT SEL
DI1 Output is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1. 1
All parameters
Reference
4031 SLEEP
BOOST STEP
4030 SLEEP
BOOST TIME

DI1(INV) Output is frozen on the falling edge of digital input DI1. -1
4036 INTERNAL
SETPNT2
Selects a constant value as the process PID controller
reference, which becomes active when parameter 4010
SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 2 is
selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT
SETPNT SEL.
40.0%
-100.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4037 INTERNAL
SETPNT3
SETPNT SEL.
40.0%
-100.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4038 INTERNAL
SETPNT4
SETPNT SEL.
40.0%
-100.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4039 INT SETPNT
SEL
Selects the source for the selection of the internal setpoint
used as the process PID controller reference when
parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL.
Example:
4010 SET POINT SEL = INTERNAL
4039 INT SETPNT SEL = DI2
Digital input DI2 = 1
-> 4012 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used as the reference.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used as the reference. 0
DI1 0 = 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used. 1 = 4036 INTERNAL
SETPNT2 is used.
1
All parameters

DI1,2 Selects with digital inputs DI1 and DI2 which internal
setpoint is used as the reference. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI
inactive.
7
TIMED FUNC 1 0 = 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used. 1 = 4036 INTERNAL
SETPNT2 is used.
15
TIMED
FUN1&2
Selects with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 which
internal setpoint is used as the reference. 1 = timed function
active, 0 = timed function inactive.
19
41 PROCESS PID
SET 2
Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 2. See section
PID control on page 133.
4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN.
4102 INTEGRATION
TIME
See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME.
4103 DERIVATION
TIME
See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME.
4104 PID DERIV
FILTER
See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
4105 ERROR
VALUE INV
See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV.
4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS.
4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4108 0% VALUE See parameter 4008 0% VALUE.
4110 SET POINT
SEL
See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
4111 INTERNAL
SETPNT
See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT.
All parameters
DI1 DI2 Internal setpoint selected
0 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT
1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2
TIMED
FUNC 1
TIMED
FUNC 2
Internal setpoint selected
0 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT

4112 SETPOINT
MIN
See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN.
4113 SETPOINT
MAX
See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX.
4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
4115 FBK
MULTIPLIER
See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER.
4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT.
4118 ACT1
MINIMUM
4119 ACT1
MAXIMUM
See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM.
4120 ACT2
MINIMUM
4121 ACT2
MAXIMUM
4122 SLEEP
SELECTION
See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION.
4123 PID SLEEP
LEVEL
See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
4124 PID SLEEP
DELAY
See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY.
4125 WAKE-UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE-UP DEV.
4126 WAKE-UP
DELAY
See parameter 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY.
4128 PID OUT MIN See parameter 4028 PID OUT MIN.
4129 PID OUT MAX See parameter 4029 PID OUT MAX.
4130 SLEEP BOOST
TIME
See parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME.
4131 SLEEP BOOST
STEP
See parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP.
4136 INTERNAL
SETPNT2
See parameter 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2.
4137 INTERNAL
SETPNT3
4138 INTERNAL
SETPNT4
4139 INT SETPNT
SEL
See parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL.
42 EXT / TRIM PID External/Trim PID (PID2) control. See section PID control
on page 133.
4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN.
4202 INTEGRATION
TIME
See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME.
4203 DERIVATION
TIME
See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME.
All parameters

4204 PID DERIV
FILTER
See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
4205 ERROR
VALUE INV
See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV.
4206 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS.
4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4210 SET POINT
SEL
See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
4211 INTERNAL
SETPNT
See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT.
4212 SETPOINT
MIN
See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN.
4213 SETPOINT
MAX
See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX.
4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
4215 FBK
MULTIPLIER
See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER.
4218 ACT1
MINIMUM
4219 ACT1
MAXIMUM
4220 ACT2
MINIMUM
4221 ACT2
MAXIMUM
4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation
signal. Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT
SEL.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start. Start (drive running) = active. 7
ON Activation at drive power-up. Power-up (drive powered) =
active.
8
TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function. Timed function 1 active = PID
control active. See parameter group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS.
9
All parameters

DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1
4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output.
When PID controller is activated, controller output starts
from the offset value. When PID controller is deactivated,
controller output is reset to the offset value.
Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct
and proportional trimming. With trimming it is possible to
combine a corrective factor to the drive reference. See
section Reference trimming on page 119.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No trim function selected 0
PROPORTION
AL
Active. The trimming factor is proportional to the rpm/Hz
reference before trimming (REF1).
1
DIRECT Active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed,
frequency or torque).
2
4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function. See section
Reference trimming on page 119.
0.0%
-100.0…100.0% Multiplier 1 = 0.1%
4232 CORRECTION
SRC
Selects the trim reference. See section Reference trimming
on page 119.
PID2REF
PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4210 (ie signal 0129
PID 2 SETPNT value)
1
PID2OUTPUT PID2 output, ie signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2
44 PUMP
PROTECTION
Set-up of pump protection.
4401 INLET PROT
CTRL
Enables, and selects the mode of, the primary supervision
of pump/fan inlet pressure.
Note: Inlet protection is active only when the active
reference is PID.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Primary inlet pressure supervision not used 0
ALARM Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the
control panel display.
1
All parameters

PROTECT Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the
control panel display. The output of the PI controller is
ramped down (according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC
TIME) to the forced reference (set by parameter 4408
INLET FORCED REF). The drive will revert to the original
reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the
supervision level.
The following diagram describes the inlet pressure
supervision function.
2
FAULT Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault. 3
4402 AI MEASURE
INLET
Selects the analog input for pump/fan inlet pressure
supervision.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No analog input selected 0
AI1 Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through analog input AI1 1
AI2 See selection AI1. 2
4403 AI IN LOW
LEVEL
Sets the supervision limit for the primary inlet pressure
measurement. If the value of the selected input falls below
this limit, the action defined by parameter 4401 INLET
PROT CTRL is taken after the delay set by parameter 4407
INLET CTRL DLY expires.
0.00%
0.00…100.00% The range corresponds to 0…10 V or 0…20 mA on the
analog input. With a bipolar input, the absolute input value is
considered.
1 = 0.01%
4404 VERY LOW
CTRL
Enables, and selects the mode of, the secondary inlet
pressure supervision function. The function uses the analog
input selected by parameter 4402 AI MEASURE INLET.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used 0
STOP Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive. The
drive will start again if the pressure exceeds the supervision
level.
1
FAULT Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault. 2
4405 AI IN VERY
LOW
Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure
monitoring function. See parameter 4401 INLET PROT
CTRL.
0.00%
0.00…100.00% Supervision level 1 = 0.01%
All parameters
Measured inlet
pressure
PFC reference
(EXT 2)
4403
4405
4407
4408
t
t
4417

4406 DI STATUS
INLET
Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch
at the pump/fan inlet. The “normal” state is 1 (active). If the
selected input switches to 0 (inactive), the action defined by
parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is executed after the
delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No digital input selected 0
DI1 Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through digital input DI1 1
4407 INLET CTRL
DLY
Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter
4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of low inlet
pressure
60.0 s
0.1…1800.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4408 INLET
FORCED REF
This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure.
See parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL.
operation using this reference.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Forced reference 1 = 0.1%
4409 OUTLET PROT
CTRL
Enables, and selects the mode of, the primary supervision
of pump/fan outlet pressure.
Note: Outlet protection is active only when the active
reference is PID.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Primary outlet pressure supervision not used 0
ALARM Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the
control panel display.
1
All parameters

PROTECT Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the
control panel display. The output of the PI controller is
ramped down (according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC
TIME) to the forced reference (set by parameter 4416
OUTLET FORCED REF). The drive will revert to the original
reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the
supervision level.
The following diagram describes the outlet pressure
supervision function.
2
FAULT Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault. 3
4410 AI MEAS
OUTLET
Selects the analog input for pump/fan outlet pressure
supervision.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No analog input selected 0
AI1 Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through analog input
AI1
1
AI2 See selection AI1. 2
4411 AI OUT HI
LEVEL
Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure
measurement. If the value of the selected analog input
exceeds this limit, the action defined by parameter 4409
OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set with
parameter 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires.
100.00%
4412 VERY HIGH
CTRL
Enables, and selects the mode of, the secondary outlet
pressure supervision function. The function uses the analog
input selected by parameter 4410 AI MEAS OUTLET.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used 0
STOP Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive. The
drive will start again if the pressure falls below the
supervision level.
1
FAULT Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive on a
fault.
2
4413 AI OUT VERY
HIGH
Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monitoring
function. See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL.
100.00%
All parameters
Measured outlet
pressure
4415
PFC reference
(EXT 2)
4413
4411
4417
4416
t
t

4414 DI STATUS
OUTLET
Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch
at the pump/fan outlet. The “normal” state is 1 (active). If the
selected input switches to 0 (inactive), the action defined by
parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay
set by parameter 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No digital input selected. 0
DI1 Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through digital input
DI1
1
4415 OUTLET CTRL
DLY
Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter
4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of high
outlet pressure.
60.0 s
0.1…1800.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4416 OUTLET
FORCED REF
This reference is used after detection of high outlet
pressure. See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL.
operation using this reference.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Forced reference 1 = 0.1%
4417 PID OUT DEC
TIME
PI controller ramp-down time. See selection PROTECT for
parameters 4401 INLET PROT CTRL and 4409 OUTLET
PROT CTRL.
60.0 s
0.0…3800.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4418 APPL
PROFILE CTL
Parameters 4418 APPL PROFILE CTL to 4420 PROF
LIMIT ON DLY provide the Application Profile protection
feature, based on long-term monitoring of an internal status
signal. If the selected signal exceeds (and remains above)
the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay
(parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY), the internal status
signal “PROFILE HIGH” is set to 1. The signal can be
directed to a relay output (see parameter group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS).
NOT SEL
CONTROL
DEV1
Signal 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to
parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM. Monitoring the
deviation between the reference and the actual value gives
an indication of the general condition of the pump, piping
and valves.
1
CONTROL
DEV2
Signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to
parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM. Monitoring the
deviation between the reference and the actual value gives
an indication of the general condition of the pump, piping
and valves.
2
APPL OUTPUT Signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT is monitored and
compared to parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM. The
signal constantly remaining at 100% may indicate a leak in
the output piping.
3
4419 PROFILE
OUTP LIM
Supervision limit for the Application Profile protection 100.0%
All parameters

-500.0…500.0% Supervision limit 1 = 0.1%
4420 PROF LIMIT
ON DLY
Delay time for the Application Profile protection 0.00 h
0.00…100.00 h Delay time 1 = 0.01 h
4421 PIPEFILL
ENABLE
Enables the Precharge function, which calculates reference
steps.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Not enabled 0
DI1 When DI1 is active (1), Precharge function is active when
the drive is started. If DI1 becomes inactive (0) before
Precharge is finished, normal PID control is enabled.
1
ACTIVE Precharge is active at every start-up. 7
DI1(INV) When DI1 is inactive (0), Precharge function is active when
the drive is started. If DI1 becomes active (1) before
Precharge is finished, normal PID control is enabled.
-1
4422 PIPEFILL
STEP
Defines the speed step used in Precharge. The PID
reference ramp time is specified by parameter 4032 PID
REF ACC TIME.
The speed step is added to the reference after the time
defined by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY has elapsed
and the change in feedback defined by parameter 4423
REQ ACT CHANGE has not been reached.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Speed step in percent of the maximum speed output 1 = 0.1%
4423 REQ ACT
CHANGE
Defines the requested change in process feedback during
the time that is set by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY.
If the requested change in the feedback is not reached,
4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum speed 1 = 0.1%
4424 ACT CHANGE
DELAY
Defines the time that is waited after the feedback value is
compared with the old feedback value.
If parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE is measured in the
feedback value, the speed reference stays as it is. If REQ
ACT CHANGE is not seen in the feedback value, the value
of parameter 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed
reference.
0.0 s
0.1…6000.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4425 PID ENABLE
DEV
Defines the level when Precharge is disabled and PID is
enabled. When the level is reached, PID is enabled. PID is
executed as parameterized. If reference ramp times are set,
they are used.
0.1%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum feedback. 1 = 0.1%
All parameters

4426 PIPEFILL
TIMEOUT
Defines the maximum time Precharge is allowed to operate.
If this time elapses, PID is preset and PID is allowed to run
as it is parameterized – with or without reference ramps.
NOT SEL
0 = NOT SEL
1…60000 s
0: NOT SEL
1…60000 s: Max. Precharge operating time
1 = 1 s
45 ENERGY SAVING Set-up of calculation and optimization of energy savings.
4501 ENERGY
OPTIMIZER
Enables or disables the energy optimizer, which optimizes
the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor
noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the
nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be
improved by 1…10% depending on load torque and speed.
OFF
OFF Disabled 0
ON Enabled 1
4502 ENERGY
PRICE
Price of energy per kWh. Used for reference when energy
savings are calculated. See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH,
0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177
SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2.
0.00
(Currency)
0.00…655.35 Price of energy per kWh 1 = 0.1
(Currency)
4507 CO2 CONV
FACTOR
Conversion factor used for multiplying the saved energy in
MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2.
0.5
tn/MWh
0.0…6553.5
tn/MWh
Conversion factor 1 = 0.1
tn/MWh
4508 PUMP POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply. Used for
reference when energy savings are calculated. See
parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176
SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178
SAVED CO2.
100.0%
0.0…1000.0% Pump power in percent of nominal motor power 1 = 0.1%
4509 ENERGY
RESET
Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED
MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2
and 0178 SAVED CO2.
DONE
DONE Reset not requested (normal operation). 0
RESET Reset energy counters, The value reverts automatically to
DONE.
1
All parameters

46 PUMP CLEANING Set-up of pump cleaning.
4601 PUMP CLEAN
TRIG
Defines how Pump cleaning is triggered. The pump
cleaning sequence consists of forward and reverse “steps”.
WARNING! Before enabling the Pump cleaning
function ensure it is safe to perform the Pump cleaning
sequence with the connected equipment.
Notes:
The Pump cleaning overrides parameter 1003 DIRECTION.
The Pump cleaning function observes the maximum forward
and reverse frequencies (parameters 2007 MINIMUM
FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ).
The Pump cleaning always uses acceleration time 2
(parameter 2205) and deceleration time 2 (parameter
2206).
The drive must be started and its Run Enable signal must
be present before the Pump cleaning sequence can start.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No triggering source defined. 0
DI1 Trigger on the rising edge of digital input DI1 1
DI1/SUP1OVR Enable on the rising edge of digital input DI1, trigger on
SUPRV1 OVER (parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1). See
parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
7
DI2/SUP1OVR See selection DI1/SUP1OVR. 8
SUPRV1
OVER
Trigger on SUPRV1 OVER (parameter 1401 RELAY
OUTPUT 1). See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
12
DRIVE START Trigger when the drive receives a start command 13
TIMER TRIG Pump cleaning sequence is started periodically at intervals
defined by parameter 4607 TRIG TIME.
14
DI1(INV) Trigger on the falling edge of digital input DI1 -1
All parameters
t
Forward
Reverse
4607 46044605 4606 4604 4605 4604
4603
4602
4608

DI1(INV)S1O Enable on the falling edge of digital input DI1, trigger on
SUPRV1 OVER (parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1). See
-7
DI2(INV)S1O See selection DI1(INV)S1O. -8
4602 FWD STEP Defines the forward step frequency for the pump cleaning
sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency
(parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ).
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Forward step frequency 1 = 0.1%
4603 REV STEP Defines the reverse step frequency for the pump cleaning
sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency
(parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ).
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Reverse step frequency 1 = 0.1%
4604 OFF TIME Defines the length of the interval between forward and
reverse steps in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds.
0.0 s
0.0…1000.0 s Off time (step interval) 1 = 0.1 s
4605 FWD TIME Defines the duration of each forward step in the pump
cleaning sequence in seconds.
0.0 s
0.0…1000.0 s Forward step duration 1 = 0.1 s
4606 REV TIME Defines the duration of each reverse step in the pump
cleaning sequence in seconds.
0.0 s
0.0…1000.0 s Reverse step duration 1 = 0.1 s
4607 TRIG TIME Defines the time for setting TIMER TRIG of parameter 4601
PUMP CLEAN TRIG.
0.0 h
0.0…200.0 h Trigger time in hours 1 = 0.1 h
4608 COUNT Number of steps to be performed in the pump cleaning
sequence.
0
0…100 Number of steps 1 = 1
52 PANEL COMM Communication settings for the control panel port on the
drive
5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive. Two units with the same
address are not allowed on-line.
1
1…247 Address 1 = 1
All parameters

5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6
9.6 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 1 = 0.1
kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s
5203 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting
must be used in all on-line stations.
8 NONE 1
8 NONE 1 No parity bit, one stop bit 0
8 NONE 2 No parity bit, two stop bits 1
8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit, one stop bit 2
8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit 3
5204 OK
MESSAGES
Number of valid messages received by the drive. During
normal operation, this number increases constantly.
0
0…65535 Number of messages 1 = 1
5205 PARITY
ERRORS
Number of characters with a parity error received from the
Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the parity
settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same.
Note: High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors.
0
0…65535 Number of characters 1 = 1
5206 FRAME
ERRORS
Number of characters with a framing error received by the
Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the
communication speed settings of the devices connected on
the bus are the same.
0
5207 BUFFER
OVERRUNS
Number of characters which overflow the buffer, ie number
of characters which exceed the maximum message length,
128 bytes.
0
5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy
check) error received by the drive. If the number is high,
check CRC calculation for possible errors.
0
53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings. See chapter Fieldbus
control with embedded fieldbus on page 265.
5301 EFB
PROTOCOL ID
Contains the identification and program revision of the
protocol.
0000…FFFF
hex
Format XXYY hex, where XX = protocol ID and
YY = program revision of the protocol.
5302 EFB STATION
ID
Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same
address are not allowed on-line.
1
0…65535 Address 1 = 1
All parameters

5303 EFB BAUD
RATE
Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6
1.2 1.2 kbit/s 1 = 0.1
kbit/s2.4 2.4 kbit/s
4.8 4.8 kbit/s
9.6 9.6 kbit/s
19.2 19.2 kbit/s
38.4 38.4 kbit/s
57.6 57.6 kbit/s
76.8 76.8 kbit/s
5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s) and the data length.
The same setting must be used in all on-line stations.
8 NONE 1
8 NONE 1 No parity bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 0
8 NONE 2 No parity bit, two stop bits, 8 data bits 1
8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 2
8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 3
5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE
Selects the communication profile. See section
Communication profiles on page 278.
ABB DRV
LIM
ABB DRV LIM ABB Drive limited profile 0
DCU PROFILE DCU profile 1
ABB DRV
FULL
ABB Drives profile 2
5306 EFB OK
MESSAGES
Number of valid messages received by the drive. During
normal operation, this number increases constantly.
0
5307 EFB CRC
ERRORS
Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy
check) error received by the drive. If the number is high,
check CRC calculation for possible errors.
0
5308 EFB UART
ERRORS
Number of messages with a character error received by the
drive
0
5309 EFB STATUS Status of the EFB protocol IDLE
IDLE EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages. 0
EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing. 1
TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the
network master and the EFB protocol.
2
CONFIG
ERROR
EFB protocol has a configuration error. 3
OFF-LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT
addressed to this drive.
4
ON-LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to
this drive.
5
All parameters

RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset. 6
LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen-only mode. 7
5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register
40005.
0
0…65535 Parameter index 1 = 1
40006.
0
40007.
0
40008.
0
40009.
0
40010.
0
40011.
0
40012.
0
5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus: Sets an additional delay before the drive
begins transmitting response to the master request.
0
0…65535 Delay in milliseconds 1 = 1
5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL)
Control Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word.
0000 hex
0000…FFFF
hex
Control Word
5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL)
Status Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word.
0000 hex
0000…FFFF
hex
Status Word
64 LOAD
ANALYZER
Load analyzing function for peak value and amplitude. See
section Load analyzer on page 145.
6401 PVL SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for peak value 103
0102 SPEED.
6402 PVL FILTER
TIME
Defines the filter time for peak value logging 0.1 s
0.0…120.0 s Filter time 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters

6403 LOGGERS
RESET
Defines the source for the reset of loggers. NOT SEL
NOT SEL No reset selected 0
DI1 Reset loggers on the rising edge of DI1. 1
RESET Reset loggers. Parameter is set to NOT SEL. 7
DI1(INV) Reset loggers on the falling edge of DI1. -1
6404 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 103
0102 SPEED.
6405 AL2 SIGNAL
BASE
Defines the base value from which the percentage
distribution is calculated. Representation and default value
depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2
SIGNAL.
-
- -
6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter
6401 PVL SIGNAL
-
- -
6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection 0 d
0…65535 d Day on which the peak value was detected.
1 = 1 d
6408 PEAK TIME 2 Time of the peak value detection 00:00:00
00:00:00…
23:59:58
6409 CURRENT AT
PEAK
Current at the moment of the peak value 0.0 A
0.0…6553.5 A 1 = 0.1 A
6410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value 0 V
0…65535 V 1 = 1 V
6411 FREQ AT
PEAK
Output frequency at the moment of the peak value 0.0 Hz
0.0…6553.5 Hz 1 = 0.1 Hz
6412 TIME OF
RESET 1
Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 0 d
All parameters

0…65535 d Day of the last reset.
1 = 1 d
6413 TIME OF
RESET 2
Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 00:00:00
00:00:00…
23:59:58
6414 AL1RANGE0T
O10
Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of maximum current)
0…10% distribution
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6415 AL1RANGE10
TO20
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6416 AL1RANGE20
TO30
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6417 AL1RANGE30
TO40
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6418 AL1RANGE40
TO50
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6419 AL1RANGE50
TO60
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6420 AL1RANGE60
TO70
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6421 AL1RANGE70
TO80
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6422 AL1RANGE80
TO90
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6423 AL1RANGE90
TO
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6424 AL2RANGE0T
O10
Amplitude logger 2 (selection with parameter 6404) 0…10%
distribution
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6425 AL2RANGE10
TO20
Amplitude logger 2 (selection with parameter 6404)
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6426 AL2RANGE20
TO30
0.0%
All parameters

0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6427 AL2RANGE30
TO40
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6428 AL2RANGE40
TO50
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6429 AL2RANGE50
TO60
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6430 AL2RANGE60
TO70
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6431 AL2RANGE70
TO80
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6432 AL2RANGE80
TO90
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6433 AL2RANGE90
TO
0.0%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
81 PFC CONTROL Set-up of Pump-Fan Control (PFC) mode. See section PFC
and SPFC control on page 146.
8103 REFERENCE
STEP 1
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process
reference. Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant
speed) motor is running.
Example: The drive operates three parallel pumps that
maintain water pressure in a pipe.
Parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant
pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe.
The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water
consumption levels.
As water consumption increases, first one constant speed
pump operates, then, the second.
As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe
drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end. As
auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments
below correct the reference to more closely match the
output pressure.
When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the
reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
When two auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference
with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2.
When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference
with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105
REFERENCE STEP 3.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
All parameters

8104 REFERENCE
STEP 2
reference. Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant
speed) motors are running.
See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
8105 REFERENCE
STEP 3
reference. Applies only when at least three auxiliary
(constant speed) motors are running.
See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
0.0%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
8109 START FREQ
1
Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor.
The first auxiliary motor starts if:
• no auxiliary motors are running
• drive output frequency exceeds limit 8109 + 1 Hz
• output frequency stays above a relaxed limit (8109 - 1 Hz)
for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
After the first auxiliary motor starts, output frequency
decreases by value (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW
FREQ 1).
In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor.
E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
See the figure, where:
A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
B = Output frequency increase during the start delay.
C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as
frequency increases (1 = On).
Note: 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between
8112 LOW FREQ 1 and (2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
All parameters
AB
1
0
C
A
t
t
8115
8112
(8109)+1
8109
f (Hz)
fMAX
fMIN

8110 START FREQ
2
Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary
motor. See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description
of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:
• one auxiliary motor is running
• output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 -
1 Hz) for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8111 START FREQ
3
Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary
motor. See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description
of the operation.
The third auxiliary motor starts if:
• two auxiliary motors are running
• output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 -
1 Hz) for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor.
The first auxiliary motor stops if:
• only one (the first) auxiliary motor is running
• drive output frequency drops below limit 8112 - 1 Hz.
• output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8112 +
1 Hz) for at least time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
After the first auxiliary motor stops, output frequency
increases by value (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW
FREQ 1).
In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases
to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor.
E: 25.0 Hz
U: 30.0 Hz
All parameters

See the figure, where:
A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.
C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as
frequency decreases (1 = On).
Grey path = Shows hysteresis – if time is reversed, the path
backwards is not the same. For details on the path for
starting, see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note: 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between
(2007 MINIMUM FREQ) + 1 HZ and 8109 START FREQ 1
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary
motor. See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of
the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• two auxiliary motors are running
• drive output frequency drops below limit 8113 - 1 Hz
1 Hz) for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
E: 25.0 Hz
U: 30.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary
motor. See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of
the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• three auxiliary motors are running
• drive output frequency drops below limit 8114 - 1 Hz
1 Hz) for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
E: 25.0 Hz
U: 30.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8115 AUX MOT
START D
Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.
The output frequency must remain above the start
frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110 or 8111) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor starts.
See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the
operation.
5.0 s
All parameters
B
1
0
C
A
A8112
(8112)-1
8109
f (Hz)
fMIN
fMAX
8116
t
t

0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
8116 AUX MOT
STOP D
Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.
The output frequency must remain below the low frequency
limit (parameter 8112, 8113 or 8114) for this time period
before the auxiliary motor stops.
See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the
operation.
3.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
8117 NR OF AUX
MOT
Sets the number of auxiliary motors. Each auxiliary motor
requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send
start/stop signals.
The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional
relay output for the speed regulated motor.
The following describes the set-up of the required relay
outputs.
Relay outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay
output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals. The
following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and
relays.
The drive provides one relay output RO1. An external relay
output module can be added to provide relay outputs
RO2…RO4.
Note: If five auxiliary motors are used (Autochange
disabled), use transistor output TO in addition to relay
outputs RO1…RO4. Note that max. voltage at TO is
30 V DC.
Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410 define, respectively, how
relays RO1…RO4 are used – the parameter value 31 (PFC)
defines the relay as used for PFC.
The drive assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending
order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a
parameter setting = 31 (PFC), and so on.
If the Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate.
Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to
the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 (PFC), the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay
with a parameter setting = 31 (PFC), and so on. The fourth
auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low
frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary
motor.
1
0…4 (5 with TO) Number of auxiliary motors 1 = 1
All parameters

All parameters
Standard PFC mode
Relay logic
PFC with Autochange mode

The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for
some typical settings in the relay output parameters
(1401…1403 and 1410), where the settings are either = 31
(PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and where the Autochange
function is disabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0).
The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for
some typical settings in the relay output parameters
(1401…1403 and 1410), where the settings are either = 31
(PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and where the Autochange
function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV > 0).
All parameters
Parameter setting Relay assignment
1
4
0
1
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
3
1
4
1
0
8
1
1
7
Autochange disabled
RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4
31 X X X 1 Aux. X X X
31 31 X X 2 Aux. Aux. X X
31 31 31 X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X
X 31 31 X 2 X Aux. Aux. X
31 31 X X 1* Aux. Aux. X X
* = One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use.
One motor is in “sleep” when the other is rotating.
Parameter setting Relay assignment
1
4
0
1
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
3
1
4
1
0
8
1
1
7
Autochange enabled
RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4
31 31 X X 1 PFC PFC X X
31 31 31 X 2 PFC PFC PFC X
X 31 31 X 1 X PFC PFC X
31 31 X X 0** PFC PFC X X
** = No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in
use. Working as a standard PID-control.

8118 AUTOCHNG
INTERV
Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the
interval between changes.
The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when
the speed regulated motor is running.
See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of
the Autochange function.
The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is
performed. Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120
INTERLOCKS > 0.
WARNING! When enabled, the Autochange function
requires the interlocks (8120 INTERLOCKS > 0)
enabled. During autochange the power output is interrupted
and the drive coasts to stop, preventing damage to the
contacts.
NOT SEL
-0.1 = TEST
MODE
0.0 = NOT SEL
0.1…336.0 h
-0.1: Test mode. Forces the interval to value 36…48 s.
0.0: Disables the Autochange function.
0.1…336 h: The operating time interval (the time when the
start signal is on) between automatic motor changes.
1 = 0.1 h
All parameters
Relay logic
PFC with Autochange mode

8119 AUTOCHNG
LEVEL
Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the
autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFC
control block exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented.
For example, use this parameter to deny autochange when
the Pump-Fan system is operating near maximum capacity.
Autochange overview
The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty
time between multiple motors used in a system. At each
autochange operation, a different motor takes a turn
connected to the drive output – the speed regulated motor.
The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochange function requires:
• external switch gear for changing the drive’s output power
connections
• parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS > 0.
Autochange is performed when:
• the running time since the previous autochange reaches
the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV
• the PFC input is below the level set by this parameter,
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
Note: The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is
performed.
50.0%
In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the
following (see the figure):
• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last
autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and
PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
• Stops the speed regulated motor.
• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor.
• Increments the starting order counter, to change the
starting order for the motors.
• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated
motor.
• Switches off the above motor’s contactor, if the motor was
running. Any other running motors are not interrupted.
• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated
motor. The autochange switch gear connects this motor
to the drive power output.
• Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation.
• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed
regulated motor had been running (as a constant speed
motor) – This step keeps an equal number of motors
running before and after autochange.
• Continues with normal PFC operation.
All parameters

Starting order counter
The operation of the starting-order counter:
• The relay output parameter definitions (1401…1403 and
1410) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest
parameter number with a value 31 (PFC) identifies the
relay connected to 1PFC, the first motor, and so on.)
• Initially, 1PFC = speed regulated motor, 2PFC = 1st
auxiliary motor, etc.
• The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFC =
speed regulated motor, 3PFC = 1st auxiliary motor, …,
1PFC = last auxiliary motor.
• The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so
on.
• If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because
all inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an
alarm (2015 PFC I LOCK).
• When the drive power supply is switched off, the counter
preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in
permanent memory. When power is restored, the
Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in
memory.
• If the PFC relay configuration is changed (or if the PFC
enable value is changed), the rotation is reset according
to parameters 1401…1403 and 1410.
All parameters
B
A
A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL – autochange
not allowed
B = Autochange occurs
1PFC, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
t
8118
100%
8119
3PFC
2PFC
1PFC
PID output
4PFC
2PFC
3PFC
4PFC
8118
8122

0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the
Interlock function is enabled:
• an interlock is active when its command signal is absent
• an interlock is inactive when its command signal is
present.
• the drive will not start if a start command occurs when the
speed regulated motor’s interlock is active – the control
panel displays an alarm (2015 PFC I LOCK).
Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:
• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the
Interlock circuit – the drive’s PFC logic can then
recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next
available motor.
• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other
protective device in the motor circuit) to the Interlock input
– the drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor
fault is activated and stop the motor.
DI3
NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are
available for other purposes.
Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0 (The Autochange
function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled.)
0
All parameters
Output
frequency
fMAX
8119
No aux.
motors
1 aux.
motor
2 aux.
motors
100%
Area
Autochange
is allowed PID output

DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input
(starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each PFC relay.
These assignments are defined in the following table and
depend on:
• the number of PFC relays (number of parameters
1401…1403 and 1410 with value = 31 [PFC])
• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).
1
All parameters
No. of
PFC
relays
Autochange disabled
(Parameter 8118)
Autochange enabled
(Parameter 8118)
0 DI1: Speed reg motor
DI2…DI5: Free
Not allowed
DI2: First PFC relay
DI3…DI5: Free
DI2…DI5: Free
DI3: Second PFC relay
DI4…DI5: Free
DI3…DI5: Free
DI4: Third PFC relay
DI5…DI5: Free
DI4…DI5: Free
DI5: Fourth PFC relay
DI5: Free
5 Not allowed DI1: First PFC relay
DI5: Fifth PFC relay

depend on:
2
All parameters
No. of
PFC
relays
Autochange disabled
(Parameter 8118)
Autochange enabled
(Parameter 8118)
0 DI1: Free
DI2: Speed reg motor
DI3…DI5: Free
Not allowed
1 DI1: Free
DI4…DI5: Free
DI1: Free
DI3…DI5: Free
2 DI1: Free
DI5…DI5: Free
DI1: Free
DI4…DI5: Free
3 DI1: Free
DI1: Free
DI5: Free
4 Not allowed DI1: Free
5 Not allowed Not allowed

DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input
depend on:
3
depend on:
4
All parameters
No. of
PFC
relays
Autochange disabled
(Parameter 8118)
Autochange enabled
(Parameter 8118)
0 DI1…DI2: Free
DI4…DI5: Free
Not allowed
1 DI1…DI2: Free
DI5…DI5: Free
DI1…DI2: Free
DI4…DI5: Free
2 DI1…DI2: Free
DI1…DI2: Free
DI5: Free
3 Not allowed DI1…DI2: Free
4…5 Not allowed Not allowed
No. of
PFC
relays
Autochange disabled
(Parameter 8118)
Autochange enabled
(Parameter 8118)
0 DI1…DI3: Free
DI5: Free
Not allowed
1 DI1…DI3: Free
DI1…DI3: Free
DI5: Free

depend on:
5
8121 REG BYPASS
CTRL
Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled,
Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control
mechanism without a PID regulator.
NO
Use Regulator by-pass control only in special applications.
All parameters
No.
PFC
relays
Autochange disabled
(Parameter 8118)
Autochange enabled
(Parameter 8118)
0 DI1…DI4: Free
Not allowed
A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
C = Two auxiliary motors running
A B C (%)
8109
fOUT
fMAX
8110
8113
8112
fMIN
4014

Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s outlet
flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A).
NO Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive uses the
normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT.
0
YES Enables Regulator by-pass control.
The process PID regulator is bypassed. Actual value of PID
is used as the PFC reference (input). (Normally 1106 REF2
SELECT is used as the PFC reference.)
The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK
SEL (or 4114) for the PFC frequency reference.
The first figure for parameter 8121 shows the relation
between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL (or 4114) and the
speed regulated motor’s frequency in a three-motor system.
1
8122 PFC START
DELAY
Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the
system. Using the delay, the drive works as follows:
• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor,
connecting the motor to the drive power output.
• Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 AUX MOT
START D for delay.
WARNING! Motors equipped with star-delta starters
require a PFC Start Delay.
After the drive relay output switches a motor on, the star-
delta starter must switch to the star-connection and then
back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.
So, the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time
setting of the star-delta starter.
0.50 s
0.01…10.00 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s
All parameters
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
P1
P2
P3
P1
P2
P3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A
Mains 3~
Inlet pipe
Outlet
pipe 1
Outlet
pipe 2
Outlet
pipe 3
Con-
tactors
Sewage
tank
Drive

8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control or SPFC control. When enabled, PFC
control or SPFC control does the following:
• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as
output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109
START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch
points in terms of the drive output frequency.
• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as
auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed
regulated motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken
off line.
• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL Disabled 0
ACTIVE PFC control enabled 1
SPFC ACTIVE SPFC control enabled. Soft Pump and Fan Control is used
for alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are
desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started.
2
8124 ACC IN AUX
STOP
Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum
frequency ramp. This PFC acceleration ramp:
• applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary
motor is switched off
• replaces the acceleration ramp defined in group 22
ACCEL/DECEL
• applies only until the output of the regulated motor
increases by an amount equal to the output of the
switched off auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp
defined in group 22 ACCEL/DECEL applies.
NOT SEL
0.0 = NOT SEL
0.1…1800.0 s
0.0: Not selected
0.1…1800 s: Activates this function using the value entered
as the acceleration time.
1 = 0.1 s
All parameters
A
B
1
0
A = speed regulated motor accelerating using group 22
ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2202 or 2205).
B = speed regulated motor decelerating using group 22
ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2203 or 2206).
At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates
using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.
At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates
using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
Aux.
motor
fOUT
8125 8124 t
t

8125 DEC IN AUX
START
• Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero
frequency ramp. This PFC deceleration ramp:
• applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary
motor is switched on.
• replaces the deceleration ramp defined in group 22
ACCEL/DECEL
• applies only until the output of the regulated motor
decreases by an amount equal to the output of the
auxiliary motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in
group 22 ACCEL/DECEL applies.
See the figure for parameter 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
NOT SEL
0.0 = NOT SEL
0.1…1800.0 s
0.0: Not selected
0.1…1800 s: Activates this function using the value entered
as the deceleration time.
1 = 0.1 s
8126 TIMED
AUTOCHNG
Sets the autochange using a Timed function. See parameter
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
NOT SEL
TIMED FUNC 1 Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active. 1
8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors (maximum
7 motors, 1 speed regulated, 3 connected direct-on-line and
3 spare motors).
This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
This value must be compatible with the number of relays
allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used.
If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated
motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC
but it needs to be included in this value.
2
1…7 Number of PFC motors 1 = 1
8128 AUX START
ORDER
Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors. EVEN
RUN
TIME
EVEN RUN
TIME
Time sharing is active. The start order depends on the run
times.
1
RELAY
ORDER
The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays. 2
98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation
9802 COMM PROT
SEL
Activates the external serial communication and selects the
interface.
NOT SEL
NOT SEL No communication 0
STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus. Interface: RS-485 provided by optional
FMBA-01 Modbus Adapter connected to drive terminal X3.
See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on
page 265.
1
MODBUS
RS232
Embedded fieldbus. Interface: RS-232 (ie control panel
connector). See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded
fieldbus on page 265.
10
All parameters

99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language.
Note: With the ACS-CP-D Assistant Control Panel, the
following languages are available: English (0), Chinese (1),
Korean (2) and Japanese (3).
ENGLISH
ENGLISH British English 0
ENGLISH (AM) American English 1
DEUTSCH German 2
ITALIANO Italian 3
ESPAÑOL Spanish 4
PORTUGUES Portuguese 5
NEDERLANDS Dutch 6
FRANÇAIS French 7
DANSK Danish 8
SUOMI Finnish 9
SVENSKA Swedish 10
RUSSKI Russian 11
POLSKI Polish 12
TÜRKÇE Turkish 13
CZECH Czech 14
MAGYAR Hungarian 15
9902 APPLIC
MACRO
Selects the application macro. See chapter Application
macros on page 99.
ABB
STANDA
RD
ABB
STANDARD
Standard macro for constant speed applications 1
3-WIRE 3-wire macro for constant speed applications 2
ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse
applications
3
MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control
applications
4
HAND/AUTO Hand/Auto macro to be used when two control devices are
connected to the drive:
• Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by
external control location EXT1.
• Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by
external control location EXT2.
EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching between
EXT1/2 through digital input.
5
PID CONTROL PID control. For application in which the drive controls a
process value. Eg pressure control by the drive running the
pressure boost pump. Measured pressure and the pressure
reference are connected to the drive.
6
PFC
CONTROL
PFC (pump and fan control) macro for pump alternation
applications
7
All parameters

SPFC
CONTROL
SPFC (soft pump and fan control) macro for pump
alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are
desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started.
15
LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop
file. Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW.
FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of
parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy
customization of the parameter list, eg selected parameters
can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01
FlashDrop User’s Manual (3AFE68591074 [English]).
31
USER S1
LOAD
User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that
the saved parameter settings and the motor model are
suitable for the application.
0
USER S1
SAVE
Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings
and the motor model.
-1
USER S2
LOAD
User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that
the saved parameter settings and the motor model are
suitable for the application.
-2
USER S2
SAVE
Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings
and the motor model.
-3
9905 MOTOR NOM
VOLT
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the
value on the motor rating plate. The drive cannot supply the
motor with a voltage greater than the input power voltage.
Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal
motor voltage but increased linearly up to value of the input
voltage.
WARNING! Never connect a motor to a drive which is
connected to power line with voltage level higher than
the rated motor voltage.
230 V
(200 V
units)
400 V
(400 V
E units)
460 V
(400 V
U units)
115…345 V
(200 V units)
200…600 V
(400 V E units)
230…690 V
(400 V U units)
Voltage.
Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always
dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to
the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the
rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
1 = 1 V
9906 MOTOR NOM
CURR
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the
value on the motor rating plate.
I2N
0.2…2.0 · I2N Current 1 = 0.1 A
All parameters
9907
9905
Output voltage
Output frequency
Input voltage

9907 MOTOR NOM
FREQ
Defines the nominal motor frequency, ie the frequency at
which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage:
Field weakening point = Nom. frequency · Supply voltage /
Motor nom. voltage
E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
10.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM
SPEED
Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the
value on the motor rating plate.
Type
dependent
50…18000 rpm Speed 1 = 1 rpm
9909 MOTOR NOM
POWER
Defines the nominal motor power. Must equal the value on
the motor rating plate.
PN
0.2…3.0 · PN kW Power 1 = 0.1
kW/hp
9914 PHASE
INVERSION
Inverts two phases in the motor cable. This changes the
direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange
the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the
drive output terminals or at the motor connection box.
NO
NO Phases not inverted 0
YES Phases inverted 1
All parameters

Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 265
13
embedded fieldbus
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network using embedded fieldbus.
System overview
The drive is connected to an external control system via embedded fieldbus. The
embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol. Modbus is a serial,
asynchronous protocol. Transaction is half-duplex.
Embedded fieldbus connection is either RS-232 (control panel connector X2) or
RS-485 (I/O terminals 23…26). The maximum length of the communication cable
with RS-232 is restricted to 3 meters.
RS-232 is designed for a point-to-point application (a single master controlling one
slave). RS-485 is designed for a multipoint application (a single master controlling
one or more slaves).

266 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, eg digital and analog inputs.
*Embedded
fieldbus (Modbus)
connection is
either RS-232 or
RS-485.
Fieldbus
controller
Fieldbus
Other
devices
RS-232*
panel connector
Process I/O (cyclic)
Service messages (acyclic)
RS-485*
I/O terminals 23…26
Drive
Data flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Status Word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W

Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, install the fieldbus according to
instructions given in section Connecting the embedded fieldbus on page 54.
The communication through the fieldbus link is initialised by setting parameter 9802
COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232. The communication
parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted. See the table
below.
After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set, the
Drive control parameters on page 268 must be checked and adjusted when
necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset.
Parameter Alternative
settings
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
9802 COMM PROT
SEL
NOT SEL
STD MODBUS
MODBUS RS232
STD MODBUS
(with RS-485)
MODBUS RS232
(with RS-232)
Initializes embedded fieldbus
communication.
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION
5302 EFB STATION ID 0…65535 Any Defines the station ID address
of the RS-232/485 link. No two
stations on line may have the
same address.
5303 EFB BAUD
RATE
1.2 kbit/s
2.4 kbit/s
4.8 kbit/s
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
38.4 kbit/s
57.6 kbit/s
76.8 kbit/s
Defines the communication
speed of the RS-232/485 link.
5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1
8 NONE 2
8 EVEN 1
8 ODD 1
Selects the parity setting. The
same settings must be used in
all on-line stations.
5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE
ABB DRV LIM
DCU PROFILE
ABB DRV FULL
Any Selects the communication
profile used by the drive. See
section Communication
profiles on page 278.
5310…5317 EFB PAR
10…17
0…65535 Any Selects an actual value to be
mapped to Modbus register
400xx.

Drive control parameters
After the Modbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed
in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter Setting for
fieldbus
control
Function/Information Modbus register
address
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU
1001 EXT1
COMMANDS
COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits
0…1 (START/STOP) when EXT1 is
selected as the active control
location.
40031 bits
0…1
1002 EXT2
COMMANDS
COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits
0…1 (START/STOP) when EXT2 is
selected as the active control
location.
40031 bits
0…1
1003
DIRECTION
FORWARD
REVERSE
REQUEST
Enables rotation direction control as
defined by parameters 1001 and
1002. The direction control is
explained in section Reference
handling on page 274.
40031 bit 2
1102
EXT1/EXT2 SEL
COMM Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection
through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5
(with ABB Drives profile 5319 EFB
PAR 19 bit 11).
40001
bit 11
40031 bit 5
1103 REF1
SELECT
COMM
COMM+AI1
COMM*AI1
Fieldbus reference REF1 is used
when EXT1 is selected as the active
control location. See section Fieldbus
references on page 271 for
information on the alternative
settings.
40002 for REF1
1106 REF2
SELECT
COMM
COMM+AI1
COMM*AI1
Fieldbus reference REF2 is used
when EXT2 is selected as the active
control location. See section Fieldbus
references on page 271 for
information on the alternative
settings.
40003 for REF2
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU
1401 RELAY
OUTPUT 1
COMM
COMM(-1)
Enables relay output RO control by
signal 0134 COMM RO WORD.
40134 for signal 0134
1501 AO1
CONTENT SEL
135 Directs the contents of fieldbus
reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1 to
analog output AO.
40135 for signal 0135
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV DCU
1601 RUN
ENABLE
COMM Enables the control of the inverted
Run Enable signal (Run Disable)
through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6
(with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB
PAR 19 bit 3).
40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6

1604 FAULT
RESET SEL
COMM Enables fault reset through fieldbus
0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 (with
ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19
bit 7).
40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4
1606 LOCAL
LOCK
COMM Local control mode lock signal
through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit
14
- 40031 bit
14
1607 PARAM
SAVE
DONE;
SAVE
Saves parameter value changes
(including those made through
fieldbus control) to permanent
memory.
41607
1608 START
ENABLE 1
COMM Inverted Start Enable 1 (Start Disable)
18
- 40032 bit
18
1609 START
ENABLE 2
COMM Inverted Start Enable 2 (Start Disable)
19
- 40032 bit
19
LIMITS ABB DRV DCU
2201 ACC/DEC
1/2 SEL
COMM ACC/DEC ramp pair selection
10
- 40031 bit
10
2209 RAMP
INPUT 0
COMM Ramp input to zero through 0301 FB
CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (with ABB drives
profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6)
40001 bit 6 40031 bit
13
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV DCU
3018 COMM
FAULT FUNC
NOT SEL
FAULT
CONST SP
7
LAST
SPEED
Determines drive action in case
fieldbus communication is lost.
43018
3019 COMM
FAULT TIME
0.1…60.0 s Defines the time between
communication loss detection and the
action selected with parameter 3018
COMM FAULT FUNC.
43019
PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU
4010/4110/4210
SET POINT SEL
COMM
COMM+AI1
COMM*AI1
PID control reference (REF2) 40003 for REF2
Parameter Setting for
fieldbus
control
Function/Information Modbus register
address

Fieldbus control interface
The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit input
and output data words (with ABB Drives profile) and 32-bit input and output words
(with DCU profile).
Control Word and Status Word
The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive
switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control
Word.
The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the
fieldbus controller.
References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (eg reverse
direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be
used as the frequency or process reference.
Actual Values
Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing selected values of the drive.

Fieldbus references
Reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COMM in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a
reference selection parameter – 1103 or 1106 – to COMM, COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1. When 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM, the
fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. When parameter 1103 or
1106 is set to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the fieldbus reference is corrected using
analog input AI1 as shown in the following examples.
Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0
COMM
+AI1
COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) + MIN
+ (AI(%) -50%) · (MAX-MIN)
COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) - MIN
+ (AI(%) -50%) · (MAX-MIN)
Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX / 1108 REF2 MAX.
Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN / 1107 REF2 MIN.
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0%
50
Corrected
reference (Hz)
25
0
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)
100%50%0%
AI = 50%
AI = 0%
AI = 100%
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
0
-25
-50
-100% -50% 0%
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0%
Corrected
reference (Hz)
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)100%50%0%
50
25
0
40
10
AI = 50%
AI = 0%
AI = 100%
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
0
-25
-50
-100% -50% 0%
-10
-40

COMM
*AI1
COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) +
MIN
COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) -
MIN
Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX / 1108 REF2 MAX.
Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN / 1107 REF2 MIN.
Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0%
50
Corrected
reference (Hz)
25
0
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)
100%50%0%
AI = 50%
AI = 0%
AI = 100%
Max limit
COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
0
-25
-50
-100% -50% 0%
Min limit
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0%
Corrected
reference (Hz)
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)100%50%0%
50
25
0
40
10
AI = 50%
AI = 0%
AI = 100%
Max limit
Min limit
COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
0
-25
-50
-100% -50% 0%
-10
-40

Fieldbus reference scaling
Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following table.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see section Reference selection and
correction on page 273) is applied before scaling.
Note: The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no
effect on the reference scaling.
Reference Range Reference
type
Scaling Remarks
REF1 -32767
…
+32767
Frequency -20000 = -(par. 1105)
0 = 0
+20000 = (par. 1105)
(20000 corresponds to 100%)
Final reference limited by
1104/1105. Actual motor
speed limited by
2007/2008.
REF2 -32767
…
+32767
Frequency -10000 = -(par. 1108)
0 = 0
+10000 = (par. 1108)
1107/1108. Actual motor
speed limited by
2007/2008.
PID
reference
-10000 = -(par. 1108)
0 = 0
+10000 = (par. 1108)
4012/4013 (PID set1) or
4112/4113 (PID set2).

Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10 START/STOP/DIR. Fieldbus references are
bipolar, ie they can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how
group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the
reference REF1/REF2.
Actual value scaling
The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depend on the
selected function. See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 149.
Direction determined by
the sign of COMM
Direction determined by digital
command, eg digital input,
control panel
par. 1003
DIRECTION =
FORWARD
par. 1003
DIRECTION =
REVERSE
par. 1003
DIRECTION =
REQUEST
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.ref.
–[Max.ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.ref.
–[Max.ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
–[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
–[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.ref.
–[Max.ref.]
-100%
100%
ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.ref.
–[Max.ref.]
-100% 100%
ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Direction
FORWARD
Command:
Direction
REVERSE
Command:

Modbus mapping
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive.
Register mapping
The drive parameters, Control/Status Word, references and actual values are
mapped to the area 4xxxx so that:
• 40001…40099 are reserved for drive control/status, reference and actual values.
• 40101…49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101…9999. (Eg 40102 is
parameter 0102). In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the
group number, while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number
within a group.
The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid.
If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses, the Modbus interface returns
an exception code to the controller. See Exception codes on page 277.
Function Code
Hex (dec)
Additional information
Read Multiple
Holding
Registers
03 (03) Reads the contents of registers in a slave device.
Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
as holding registers.
Write Single
Holding
Register
06 (06) Writes to a single register in a slave device.
Diagnostics 08 (08) Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between
the master and the slave devices, or for checking various internal
error conditions within the slave.
The following subcodes are supported:
00 Return Query Data: The data passed in the request data field is
to be returned in the response. The entire response message
should be identical to the request.
01 Restart Communications Option: The slave device serial line
port must be initialized and restarted, and all of its communication
event counters cleared. If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode,
no response is returned. If the port is not currently in Listen Only
Mode, a normal response is returned before the restart.
04 Force Listen Only Mode: Forces the addressed slave device to
Listen Only Mode. This isolates it from the other devices on the
network, allowing them to continue communicating without
interruption from the addressed remote device. No response is
returned. The only function that will be processed after this mode is
entered is the Restart Communications Option function (subcode
01).
Write Multiple
Holding
Registers
10 (16) Writes to the registers (1 to approximately 120 registers) in a slave
device.
Read/Write
Multiple
Holding
Registers
17 (23) Performs a combination of one read operation and one write
operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus
transaction. The write operation is performed before the read
operation.

The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses
40001…40012 and 40031…40034.
Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile, ie modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM SAVE to save all changed values.
Modbus register Access Information
40001 Control Word R/W Control Word. Supported only by ABB Drives profile, ie
when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV
LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19
shows a copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal
format.
40002 Reference 1 R/W External reference REF1. See section Fieldbus
references on page 271.
40003 Reference 2 R/W External reference REF2. See section Fieldbus
references on page 271.
40004 Status Word R Status Word. Supported only by ABB Drives profile,
when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV
LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20
shows a copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal
format.
40005
…
40012
Actual 1…8 R Actual value 1…8. Use parameter 5310… 5317 to
selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus
register 40005…40012.
40031 Control Word LSW R/W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1, ie the least significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Control Word.
Supported only by DCU profile, ie when 5305 EFB
CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE.
40032 Control Word MSW R/W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2, ie the most significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Control Word.
40033 Status Word LSW R 0303 FB STS WORD 1, ie the least significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Status Word.
40034 ACS310 STATUS
WORD MSW
R 0304 FB STS WORD 2, ie the most significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Status Word.

Function codes
Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register are:
Note: In the Modbus data message, register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx -1. For
example register 40002 is addressed as 0001.
Exception codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The drive
supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table.
Drive parameter 5318 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code.
Code
Hex
(dec)
Function name Additional information
03
(03)
Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of registers (4X references) in a slave
device.
06
(06)
Preset single 4X
register
Presets a value into a single register (4X reference). When
broadcast, the function presets the same register reference in all
attached slaves.
10
(16)
Preset multiple 4X
registers
Presets values into a sequence of registers (4X references). When
broadcast, the function presets the same register references in all
attached slaves.
17
(23)
Read/Write 4X
registers
Performs a combination of one read operation and one write
operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus
transaction. Write operation is performed before the read
operation.
Code Name Description
01 Illegal Function Unsupported command
02 Illegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read/write protected.
03 Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive:
Value is outside minimum or maximum limits.
Parameter is read-only.
Message is too long.
Parameter write is not allowed when start is active.
Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is selected.

Communication profiles
The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles:
• DCU communication profile
• ABB Drives Limited communication profile
• ABB Drives Full communication profile.
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, and it is the
internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment. The ABB Drives Limited is based on the PROFIBUS interface. ABB
Drives Full profile supports two Control Word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM
implementation.
ABB Drives communication profile
Two implementations of the ABB Drives communication profile are available: ABB
Drives Full and ABB Drives Limited. The ABB Drives communication profile is active
when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV
LIM. The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below.
The ABB Drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control Word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS (whichever control location is active) is set to COMM.
Data conversion
Modbus
network
Embedded fieldbus
RS-232/485
Data conversion
for REF1/2
ABB Drives profile
DCU profile DCU profile
DCU profile
Drive
Actual values
selected by par.
5310…5317
DCU PROFILE
ABB DRV FULL / LIMITED
Control/Status Word
Actual values
selected by par.
5310…5317

The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Control
Word content for the ABB Drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the
states shown in the following block diagram
ABB Drives profile Control Word (parameter 5319)
Bit Name Value Comments
0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (2203/2206).
Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, drive coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, drive stops within time defined by par. 2208.
Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped
using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT
OPERATION
1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable
signal must be active; see parameter 1601. If par. 1601 is set
to COMM, this bit also activates the Run Enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 Note: Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile.
RAMP_OUT_
ZERO (ABB DRV
FULL)
1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT
ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_
ZERO
1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED. Effective if par. 1604 is set to COMM.
0 Continue normal operation.
8…
9
Not in use
10 Note: Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile.
REMOTE_CMD
(ABB DRV FULL)
1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control Word 0 or Reference 0: Retain last Control Word
and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2. Effective if par.1102 is
set to COMM.
0 Select external control location EXT1. Effective if par. 1102 is
set to COMM.
=/ =/

The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Status
Word content for the ABB Drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the
states shown in the following block diagram
12
…
15
Reserved
ABB Drives profile (EFB) Status Word (parameter 5320)
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT. See chapter Fault tracing on page 287.
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
0 Switch-on inhibit not active
7 ALARM 1 Alarm. See chapter Fault tracing on page 287.
0 No alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is
within tolerance limits, ie the difference between the
output frequency and the frequency reference is less
than or equal to 4/1%* of the nominal motor
frequency).
* Asymmetric hysteresis: 4% when frequency enters
the reference area, 1% when frequency exits the
reference area.
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside
tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision
high limit. Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter
value falls below the supervision low limit. See
0 Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision
low limit. Bit value is 0 until the supervised parameter
value exceeds the supervision high limit. See
ABB Drives profile Control Word (parameter 5319)
Bit Name Value Comments

11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location EXT2 selected
0 External control location EXT1 selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable received
13…
15
Reserved
ABB Drives profile (EFB) Status Word (parameter 5320)
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of Control Word (CW) and
Status Word (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.
(CW xxxx x1*xx xxxx x110)
INPUT POWER OFF
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
(SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit0=0)
From any state
n(f)=0 / I=0
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
A C D
(CW Bit3 =0)
(SW Bit2 =0) (SW Bit0=1)
(CW= xxxx x1*xx xxxx x111)
(SW Bit1=1)
(CW Bit3=1 and(CW Bit4=0)*
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON
OPERATION
INHIBITED
READY TO
SWITCH ON
READY TO
OPERATE
RFG OUTPUT
ENABLED*
C* D*
From any state
Emergency Off
OFF2 (CW Bit 1=0)
(SW Bit 4=0)
OFF2
ACTIVE
From any state
Fault
(SW Bit3=1)FAULT
(CW Bit7=1)**
(SW Bit5=0)
Emergency Stop
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
SW Bit12=1)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
(CW=xxxx x1*xx xx11* 1111
(CW Bit6=0)
C
(CW=xxxx x1*xx x111* 1111
(SW Bit8=1)
D
B*
D
OPERATING
OFF3
ACTIVE
(SW Bit2=1)
OPERATION
ENABLED
(CW=xxxx x1*xx xxx1* 1111
A
(CW Bit5=0)
C D
B*
B*
(SW Bit1=0)
OFF1
ACTIVE
OPERATION INHIBITED
ie Bit4=1)*
ie Bit5=1)
ie Bit6=1)
State
State change
Path described in example
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
I = Par. 0104 CURRENT
f = Par. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed
* Supported only by ABB DRV FULL
profile.
** State transition also occurs if the fault
is reset from any other source (eg digital
input).

DCU communication profile
Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, two
different signals are needed for both the control (0301 and 0302) and status (0303
and 0304) words.
The following tables describe the Control Word content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile Control Word (parameter 0301)
Bit Name Value Information
0 STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter
(2102) or the stop mode requests (bits 7 and 8).
Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands
result in a stop command.
0 No operation
1 START 1 Start
Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands
result in a stop command.
0 No operation
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction. The direction is defined by using
the XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 (= sign of the
reference) values.
0 Forward direction.
3 LOCAL 1 Enter local control mode.
0 Enter external control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset.
other No operation
5 EXT2 1 Switch to external control EXT2.
0 Switch to external control EXT1.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Activate Run Disable.
0 Activate Run Enable.
7 STPMODE_R 1 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (bit 10).
Bit 0 value must be 1 (= STOP).
0 No operation
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (= STOP).
0 No operation
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast to stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (= STOP).
0 No operation
10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2 (defined by
parameters 2205…2207).
0 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1 (defined by
parameters 2202…2204).
11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Force ramp output to zero.
0 No operation
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0 No operation

13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Force ramp input to zero.
0 No operation
14 REQ_LOCALLOC 1 Enable local lock. Entering the local control mode is
disabled (LOC/REM key of the panel).
0 No operation
15 Reserved
DCU PROFILE Control Word (parameter 0302)
16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control Word requested.
Example: If the drive is in remote control and the
start/stop/direction command source is DI for external
control location 1 (EXT1): by setting bit 16 to value 1,
the start/stop/direction is controlled by the fieldbus
command word.
0 No fieldbus local mode
17 FBLOCAL_REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control Word for reference
requested. See example in bit 16 FBLOCAL_CTL.
0 No fieldbus local mode
18 START_DISABLE1 1 No Start Enable
0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1608 setting is
COMM.
19 START_DISABLE2 1 No Start Enable
0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1609 setting is
COMM.
20…
26
Reserved
27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed reference request.
This is an internal control bit. Only for supervision.
0 No operation
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed reference request.
0 No operation
29 LINK_ON 1 Master detected on fieldbus link.
0 Fieldbus link is down.
30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit
0 No start inhibit
31 Reserved
DCU Profile Control Word (parameter 0301)

The following tables describe the Status Word content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile Status Word (parameter 0303)
Bit Name Value Status
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External Run Enable signal received.
0 No external Run Enable signal received.
2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command.
0 Drive has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference
value (ie is within tolerance limits).
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings.
0 Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings.
9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter (group 32 SUPERVISION) is
outside its limits.
0 All supervised parameters are within limits.
10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction.
0 Drive reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.

DCU Profile Status Word (parameter 0304)
Bit Name Value Status
16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on.
0 No alarms are on.
17 NOTICE 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL_MODE 1 N/A
0 Drive is in scalar control mode.
21…
25
Reserved
26 REQ_CTL 1 Control Word requested from fieldbus
0 No operation
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested from fieldbus
0 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested from fieldbus
0 Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested from
fieldbus.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus
0 No start inhibit from fieldbus
31 Reserved

Fault tracing 287
14
Fault tracing
The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It also lists all alarm and
fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. Read
the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 before you work on the
drive.
Alarm and fault indications
Fault is indicated with a red LED. See section LEDs on page 306.
An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status.
Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be
identified and corrected. If not, contact an ABB representative.
The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus
communication. (See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265.)
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key (Basic Control Panel)
or (Assistant Control Panel), through digital input or fieldbus, or by switching the
supply voltage off for a while. The source for the fault reset signal is selected by
parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL. When the fault has been removed, the motor
can be restarted.
EXIT
RESET
RESET

288 Fault tracing
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults are stored
together with the time stamp.
Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS
FAULT 2 store the most recent faults. Parameters 0404…0409 show drive operation
data at the time the latest fault occurred. The Assistant Control Panel provides
additional information about the fault history. See section Fault Logger mode on page
92 for more information.

Fault tracing 289
Alarm messages generated by the drive
CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO
2001 OVERCURRENT
0308 bit 0
(programmable fault
function 1610)
Output current limit
controller is active.
Check motor load.
Check acceleration time (2202 and
2205).
Check motor and motor cable
(including phasing).
Check ambient conditions. Load
capacity decreases if installation site
ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.
See section Derating on page 309.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE
0308 bit 1
(programmable fault
function 1610)
DC overvoltage
Check deceleration time (2203 and
2206).
Check input power line for static or
transient overvoltage.
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE
0308 bit 2
(programmable fault
function 1610)
DC undervoltage
Check input power supply.
2004 DIR LOCK
0308 bit 3
Change of direction is
not allowed.
Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION
settings.
2005 IO COMM
0308 bit 4
(programmable fault
function 3018, 3019)
Fieldbus
communication break
Check status of fieldbus
communication. See chapter Fieldbus
control with embedded fieldbus on
page 265.
Check fault function parameter
settings.
Check connections.
Check if master can communicate.
2006 AI1 LOSS
0308 bit 5
(programmable fault
Analog input AI1 signal
has fallen below limit
defined by parameter
3021 AI1 FAULT
LIMIT.
settings.
Check for proper analog control signal
levels.
Check connections.
2007 AI2 LOSS
0308 bit 6
(programmable fault
3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT.
settings.
levels.
Check connections.

290 Fault tracing
2008 PANEL LOSS
0308 bit 7
(programmable
fault function 3002)
Control panel selected
as active control
location for drive has
ceased
communicating.
Check panel connection.
Check fault function parameters.
Check control panel connector.
Refit control panel in mounting
platform.
If drive is in external control mode
(REM) and is set to accept start/stop,
direction commands or references via
control panel:
Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR
and 11 REFERENCE SELECT
settings.
2009 DEVICE
OVERTEMP
0308 bit 8
Drive IGBT
temperature is
excessive. Alarm limit
is 120 °C.
Check ambient conditions. See also
section Derating on page 309.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check motor power against unit
power.
2010 MOTOR TEMP
0305 bit 9
(programmable fault
function
3005…3009 / 3503)
Motor temperature is
too high (or appears to
be too high) due to
excessive load,
insufficient motor
power, inadequate
cooling or incorrect
start-up data.
Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
Check start-up data.
Measured motor
temperature has
exceeded alarm limit
set by parameter 3503
ALARM LIMIT.
Check value of alarm limit.
Check that actual number of sensors
corresponds to value set by parameter
(3501 SENSOR TYPE).
Let motor cool down. Ensure proper
motor cooling: Check cooling fan,
clean cooling surfaces, etc.
2012 MOTOR STALL
0308 bit 11
(programmable fault
function
3010…3012)
Motor is operating in
stall region due to eg
excessive load or
insufficient motor
power.
Check motor load and drive ratings.
2013
1)
AUTORESET
0308 bit 12
Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31
AUTOMATIC RESET settings.
2014
1)
AUTOCHANGE
0308 bit 13
PFC Autochange
function is active.
See parameter group 81 PFC
CONTROL, section PFC Control
macro on page 108 and section SPFC
Control macro on page 109.
2015 PFC I LOCK
0308 bit 14
PFC interlocks are
active.
Drive cannot start
• any motor (when Autochange is
used)
• the speed regulated motor (when
Autochange is not used).
See parameter group 81 PFC
CONTROL.
2018
1)
PID SLEEP
0309 bit 1
Sleep function has
entered sleeping
mode.
See parameter groups 40 PROCESS
PID SET 1…
41 PROCESS PID SET 2.

Fault tracing 291
2021 START ENABLE 1
MISSING
0309 bit 4
No Start Enable 1
signal received
Check parameter 1608 START
ENABLE 1settings.
Check digital input connections.
Check fieldbus communication
settings.
2022 START ENABLE 2
MISSING
0309 bit 5
No Start Enable 2
signal received
Check parameter 1609 START
ENABLE 2 settings.
Check digital input connections.
Check fieldbus communication
settings.
2023 EMERGENCY
STOP
0309 bit 6
Drive has received
emergency stop
command and ramps
to stop according to
ramp time defined by
parameter 2208
EMERG DEC TIME.
Check that it is safe to continue
operation.
Return emergency stop push button to
normal position.
2025 FIRST START
0309 bit 8
Motor identification
magnetization is on.
This alarm belongs to
normal start-up
procedure.
Wait until drive indicates that motor
identification is completed.
2027 USER LOAD
CURVE
0309 bit 10
Condition defined by
3701 USER LOAD C
MODE has been valid
longer than half of the
time set by 3703
USER LOAD C TIME.
See parameter group 37 USER LOAD
CURVE.
2028 START DELAY
0309 bit 11
Start delay in progress See parameter 2113 START DELAY.
2030 INLET LOW
0309 bit 13
Pressure at pump/fan
inlet too low
Check for a closed valve on the inlet
side of the pump/fan.
Check piping for leaks.
See parameter group 44 PUMP
PROTECTION.
2031 OUTLET HIGH
0309 bit 14
outlet too high
Check piping for blocks.
PROTECTION.
2032 PIPE FILL
0309 bit 15
Pipe fill in progress See parameters 4421…4426.
2033 INLET VERY LOW
0310 bit 0
inlet too low
PROTECTION.
2034 OUTLET VERY
HIGH
0310 bit 1
outlet too high
PROTECTION.
1)
Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (eg parameter 1401
RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay
output.

292 Fault tracing
Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel
The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code, A5xxx.
ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO
5001 Drive is not responding. Check panel connection.
5002 Incompatible
communication profile
Contact your local ABB representative.
5010 Corrupted panel parameter
backup file
Retry parameter upload.
Retry parameter download.
5011 Drive is controlled from
another source.
Change drive control to local control mode.
5012 Direction of rotation is
locked.
Enable change of direction. See parameter
1003 DIRECTION.
5013 Panel control is disabled
because start inhibit is
active.
Start from the panel is not possible. Reset the
emergency stop command or remove the 3-wire
stop command before starting from the panel.
See section 3-wire macro on page 103 and
parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002
EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP
SEL.
because of drive fault.
Reset drive fault and retry.
because local control
mode lock is active.
Deactivate local control mode lock and retry.
See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
5018 Parameter default value is
not found.
5019 Writing non-zero
parameter value is
prohibited.
Only parameter reset is allowed.
5020 Parameter or parameter
group does not exist or
parameter value is
inconsistent.
5021 Parameter or parameter
group is hidden.
5022 Parameter is write
protected.
Parameter value is read-only and cannot be
changed.
5023 Parameter change is not
allowed, when drive is
running.
Stop drive and change parameter value.
5024 Drive is executing task. Wait until task is completed.
5025 Software is being uploaded
or downloaded.
Wait until upload/download is complete.
5026 Value is at or below
minimum limit.
5027 Value is at or above
maximum limit.
5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative.

Fault tracing 293
5029 Memory is not ready. Retry.
5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative.
5031 Drive is not ready for
operation, eg due to low
DC voltage.
Check input power supply.
5032 Parameter error Contact your local ABB representative.
5040 Parameter download error.
Selected parameter set is
not in current parameter
backup file.
Perform upload function before download.
5041 Parameter backup file
does not fit into memory.
5042 Parameter download error.
Selected parameter set is
not in current parameter
backup file.
Perform upload function before download.
5043 No start inhibit
5044 Parameter backup file
restoring error
Check that file is compatible with drive.
5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload.
5051 File error Contact your local ABB representative.
5052 Parameter upload has
failed.
Retry parameter upload.
5060 Parameter download
aborted
5062 Parameter download has
failed.
5070 Panel backup memory
write error
5071 Panel backup memory
read error
5080 Operation is not allowed
because drive is not in
local control mode.
Switch to local control mode.
because of active fault.
Check cause of fault and reset fault.
because parameter lock is
on.
Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK
setting.
because drive is
performing task.
Wait until task is completed and retry.
5085 Parameter download from
source to destination drive
has failed.
Check that source and destination drive types
are same, ie ACS310. See the type designation
label of the drive.
has failed.
Check that source and destination drive type
designations are the same. See type
designation labels of the drives.

294 Fault tracing
has failed because
parameter sets are
incompatible.
Check that source and destination drive
information are same. See parameters in group
33 INFORMATION.
5088 Operation has failed
because of drive memory
error.
5089 Download has failed
because of CRC error.
5090 Download has failed
because of data
processing error.
5091 Operation has failed
because of parameter
error.
has failed because
parameter sets are
incompatible.
Check that source and destination drive
information are same. See parameters in group
33 INFORMATION.

Fault tracing 295
Fault messages generated by the drive
CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO
0001 OVERCURRENT
(2310)
0305 bit 0
Output current has
exceeded trip level.
Check motor load.
Check acceleration time (2202 and
2205).
Check motor and motor cable
(including phasing).
Check ambient conditions. Load
capacity decreases if installation site
ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.
See section Derating on page 309.
0002 DC OVERVOLT
(3210)
0305 bit 1
Excessive
intermediate circuit DC
voltage. DC
overvoltage trip limit is
420 V for 200 V drives
and 840 V for 400 V
drives.
Check that overvoltage controller is on
(parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL).
Check input power line for static or
transient overvoltage.
Check deceleration time (2203, 2206).
0003 DEV OVERTEMP
(4210)
0305 bit 2
Drive IGBT
temperature is
excessive. Fault trip
limit is 135 °C.
Check ambient conditions. See also
section Derating on page 309.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check motor power against unit
power.
0004 SHORT CIRC
(2340)
0305 bit 3
Short circuit in motor
cable(s) or motor
Check motor and motor cable.
0006 DC UNDERVOLT
(3220)
0305 bit 5
Intermediate circuit DC
voltage is not sufficient
due to missing input
power line phase,
blown fuse, rectifier
bridge internal fault or
too low input power.
Check that undervoltage controller is
on (parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT
CTRL).
Check input power supply and fuses.
0007 AI1 LOSS
(8110)
0305 bit 6
(programmable fault
3021 AI1 FAULT
LIMIT.
settings.
levels.
Check connections.
0008 AI2 LOSS
(8110)
0305 bit 7
(programmable fault
3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT.
settings.
levels.
Check connections.

296 Fault tracing
0009 MOT OVERTEMP
(4310)
0305 bit 8
(programmable fault
function
3005…3009 / 3504)
Motor temperature is
too high (or appears to
be too high) due to
excessive load,
insufficient motor
power, inadequate
cooling or incorrect
start-up data.
Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
Check start-up data.
Measured motor
temperature has
exceeded fault limit set
by parameter 3504
FAULT LIMIT.
Check value of fault limit.
Check that actual number of sensors
corresponds to value set by parameter
(3501 SENSOR TYPE).
Let motor cool down. Ensure proper
motor cooling: Check cooling fan,
clean cooling surfaces, etc.
0010 PANEL LOSS
(5300)
0305 bit 9
(programmable fault
function 3002)
Control panel selected
as active control
location for drive has
ceased
communicating.
Check panel connection.
Check control panel connector.
Refit control panel in mounting
platform.
If drive is in external control mode
(REM) and is set to accept start/stop,
direction commands or references via
control panel:
Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR
and 11 REFERENCE SELECT
settings.
0012 MOTOR STALL
(7121)
0305 bit 11
(programmable fault
function
3010…3012)
Motor is operating in
stall region due to eg
excessive load or
insufficient motor
power.
Check motor load and drive ratings.
0014 EXT FAULT 1
(9000)
0305 bit 13
(programmable
External fault 1 Check external devices for faults.
Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL
FAULT 1 setting.
0015 EXT FAULT 2
(9001)
0305 bit 14
(programmable
External fault 2 Check external devices for faults.
Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL
FAULT 2 setting.
0016 EARTH FAULT
(2330)
0305 bit 15
(programmable fault
function 3017)
Drive has detected
earth (ground) fault in
motor or motor cable.
Check motor.
Check motor cable. Motor cable length
must not exceed maximum
specifications. See section Motor
connection data on page 314.

Fault tracing 297
0018 THERM FAIL
(5210)
0306 bit 1
Drive internal fault.
Thermistor used for
drive internal
temperature
measurement is open
or short-circuited.
Contact your local ABB
representative.
0021 CURR MEAS
(2211)
0306 bit 4
Drive internal fault.
Current measurement
is out of range.
representative.
0022 SUPPLY PHASE
(3130)
0306 bit 5
Intermediate circuit DC
voltage is oscillating
due to missing input
power line phase or
blown fuse.
Trip occurs when DC
voltage ripple exceeds
14% of nominal DC
voltage.
Check input power line fuses.
Check for input power supply
imbalance.
0024 OVERSPEED
(7310)
0306 bit 7
Motor is turning faster
than highest allowed
speed due to
incorrectly set
minimum/maximum
speed.
Operating range limits
are set by parameters
2007 MINIMUM FREQ
and 2008 MAXIMUM
FREQ.
Check minimum/maximum frequency
settings.
Check adequacy of motor braking
torque.
0026 DRIVE ID
(5400)
0306 bit 9
Internal drive ID fault Contact your local ABB
representative.
0027 CONFIG FILE
(630F)
0306 bit 10
Internal configuration
file error
representative.
0028 SERIAL 1 ERR
(7510)
0306 bit 11
(programmable fault
Fieldbus
communication break
Check status of fieldbus
communication. See chapter Fieldbus
control with embedded fieldbus on
page 265.
settings.
Check connections.
Check if master can communicate.
0029 EFB CON FILE
(6306)
0306 bit 12
Configuration file
reading error
representative.
0030 FORCE TRIP
(FF90)
0306 bit 13
Trip command
received from fieldbus
See appropriate communication
module manual.

298 Fault tracing
0031 EFB 1
(FF92)
0307 bit 0
Error from the
embedded fieldbus
(EFB) protocol
application. The
meaning is protocol
dependent.
See chapter Fieldbus control with
embedded fieldbus on page 265.
0032 EFB 2
(FF93)
0307 bit 1
0033 EFB 3
(FF94)
0307 bit 2
0034 MOTOR PHASE
(FF56)
0306 bit 14
Motor circuit fault due
to missing motor
phase or motor
thermistor relay (used
in motor temperature
measurement) fault.
Check motor and motor cable.
Check motor thermistor relay (if used).
0035 OUTP WIRING
(FF95)
0306 bit 15
(programmable fault
function 3023)
Incorrect input power
and motor cable
connection (ie input
power cable is
connected to drive
motor connection).
The fault can be
erroneously declared if
the input power is a
delta grounded system
and the motor cable
capacitance is large.
This fault can be
disabled using
parameter 3023
WIRING FAULT.
Check input power connections.
0036 INCOMPATIBLE
SW
(630F)
0307 bit 3
Loaded software is not
compatible.
representative.
0038 USER LOAD
CURVE
(FF6B)
0307 bit 4
Condition defined by
3701 USER LOAD C
MODE has been valid
longer than the time
set by 3703 USER
LOAD C TIME.
See parameter group 37 USER LOAD
CURVE.
0039 UNKNOWN
EXTENSION
(7086)
0307 bit 5
Option module not
supported by the drive
firmware is connected
to the drive.
Check connections.
0040 INLET VERY LOW
(8A81)
0307 bit 6
inlet too low
PROTECTION.

Fault tracing 299
0041 OUTLET VERY
HIGH
(8A83)
0307 bit 7
outlet too high
PROTECTION.
0042 INLET LOW
(8A80)
0307 bit 8
inlet too low
PROTECTION.
0043 OUTLET HIGH
(8A82)
0307 bit 9
outlet too high
PROTECTION.
0101 SERF CORRUPT
(FF55)
0307 bit 14
Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact
your local ABB representative.
0103 SERF MACRO
(FF55)
0307 bit 14
0201 DSP T1
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0202 DSP T2
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0203 DSP T3
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0204 DSP STACK
ERROR
(6100)
0307 bit 12
0206 CB ID ERROR
(5000)
0307 bit 11
1000 PAR HZRPM
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect frequency
limit parameter setting
Check parameter settings. Check that
following applies:
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ <
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907
MOTOR NOM FREQ and 2008
MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR
NOM FREQ are within range.

300 Fault tracing
1001 PAR PFC REF NEG
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect PFC
parameters
Check parameter group 81 PFC
CONTROL settings. Check that
following applies:
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 0 when
8123 is ACTIVE or SPFC ACTIVE.
1003 PAR AI SCALE
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect analog input
AI signal scaling
Check parameter group 13 ANALOG
INPUTS settings. Check that following
applies:
• 1301 MINIMUM AI1 <
1302 MAXIMUM AI1
• 1304 MINIMUM AI2 <
1305 MAXIMUM AI2.
1004 PAR AO SCALE
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect analog output
AO signal scaling
Check parameter group 15 ANALOG
OUTPUTS settings. Check that
following applies:
• 1504 MINIMUM AO1 <
1505 MAXIMUM AO1.
1005 PAR PCU 2
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect motor
nominal power setting
Check parameter 9909 setting.
Following must apply:
• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR ·
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT · 1.73 /
PN) < 3.0
where PN = 1000 · 9909 MOTOR
NOM POWER (if units are in kW)
or PN = 746 · 9909 MOTOR NOM
POWER (if units are in hp).
1006 PAR EXT RO
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect extension
relay output
parameters.
Check parameter settings. Check that
following applies:
• Relay Output Extension Module
MREL-0 is connected to the drive.
• 1402…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 2…3
and 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 have
non-zero values.
See MREL-01 Relay Output Extension
Module User's Manual
(3AUA0000035974 [English]).
1007 PAR FBUSMISS
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Fieldbus control has
not been activated.
Check fieldbus parameter settings.
1009 PAR PCU 1
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect motor
nominal
speed/frequency
setting
Check parameter settings. Following
must apply:
• 1 < (60 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ
/ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED) < 16
• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(120 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ /
Motor poles) < 0.992

Fault tracing 301
1012 PAR PFC IO 1
(6320)
0307 bit 15
I/O configuration for
PFC not complete
must apply:
• There are enough relays
parameterized for PFC.
• No conflict exists between
parameter group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS, parameter 8117 NR OF
AUX MOT and parameter 8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1013 PAR PFC IO 2
(6320)
0307 bit 15
PFC not complete
must apply:
• The actual number of PFC motors
(parameter 8127 MOTORS)
matches the PFC motors in
parameter group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS and parameter 8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1014 PAR PFC IO 3
(6320)
0307 bit 15
PFC not complete.
The drive is unable to
allocate a digital input
(interlock) for each
PFC motor.
See parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS
and 8127 MOTORS.
1015 PAR CUSTOM U/F
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect voltage to
frequency
(U/f) ratio voltage
setting.
Check parameter 2610 USER
DEFINED U1…2617 USER DEFINED
F4 settings.
1017 PAR SETUP 1
(6320)
0307 bit 15
It is not allowed to use
frequency input signal
and frequency output
signal simultaneously.
Disable frequency output or frequency
input:
• change transistor output to digital
mode (value of parameter 1804 TO
MODE = DIGITAL), or
• change frequency input selection to
other value in parameter groups
11 REFERENCE SELECT,
40 PROCESS PID SET 1,
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and
42 EXT / TRIM PID.
1026 PAR USER LOAD C
(6320)
0307 bit 15
Incorrect user load
curve parameter
setting
must apply:
• 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 <
3707 LOAD FREQ 2 <
3710 LOAD FREQ 3 <
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 <
3716 LOAD FREQ 5
• 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 <
3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1
3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5.

302 Fault tracing
Embedded fieldbus faults
Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL
parameters. See also fault/alarm SERIAL 1 ERR.
No master device
If there is no master device on line, parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307
EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged.
What to do:
• Check that the network master is connected and properly configured.
• Check the cable connection.
Same device address
If two or more devices have the same address, parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
value increases with every read/write command.
What to do:
• Check the device addresses. No two devices on line may have the same address.
Incorrect wiring
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one device is connected to
terminal B on another device), parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES value remains
unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases.
What to do:
• Check the RS-232/485 interface connection.

Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 303
15
Maintenance and hardware
diagnostics
The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator
descriptions.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance.
On the Internet, go to http://www.abb.com/drives and select Drive Services –
Maintenance and Field Services.
Maintenance Interval Instruction
Reforming of capacitors Every year when
stored
See Capacitors on page 305.
Check of dustiness, corrosion
and temperature
Every year
Replacement of the cooling fan
(frame sizes R1…R4)
Every three years See Cooling fan on page 304.
Check and tightening of the
power terminals
Every six years See Power connections on page 305.
Replacement of the battery in
the Assistant Control Panel
Every ten years See Changing the battery in the
Assistant Control Panel on page 306.

304 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
Cooling fan
The drive’s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours. The
actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature.
When the Assistant Control Panel is in use, the Notice Handler Assistant informs
when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached (see parameter
2901 COOLING FAN TRIG). This information can also be passed to the relay output
(see parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1) regardless of the used panel type.
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings. If the drive
is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once
these symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not
use other than ABB specified spare parts.
Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4)
Only frame sizes R1…R4 include a fan; frame size R0 has natural cooling.
WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page
15. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for five minutes to let the
drive DC capacitors discharge. Ensure by measuring with a multimeter
(impedance at least 1 Mohm) that there is no voltage present.
2. Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option.
3. Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver and lift the hinged
fan holder slightly upward from its front edge.
4. Free the fan cable from the clip in the fan holder.
5. Disconnect the fan cable. Use long-nose pliers if needed.
3
4
5

Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 305
6. Remove the fan from the holder.
7. Install the new fan in reverse order.
8. Restore power.
Capacitors
Reforming the capacitors
The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year. See section
Type designation label on page 26 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the
serial number. For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for
Capacitor Reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS350 and
ACS/ACH550 (3AFE68735190 [English]), available on the Internet (go to
http://www.abb.com and enter the code in the Search field).
Power connections
WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page
15. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for five minutes to let the
drive DC capacitors discharge. Ensure by measuring with a multimeter
(impedance at least 1 Mohm) that there is no voltage present.
2. Check the tightness of the power cable connections. Use the tightening torques
given in section Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables on page
313.
3. Restore power.
6

306 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
Control panel
Cleaning the control panel
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.
Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel
A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function
available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during
power interruptions.
The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use
a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the
battery with type CR2032.
Note: The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions, except the
clock.
LEDs
There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive. They are visible through the
panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive. The Assistant
Control Panel has one LED. The table below describes the LED indications.
Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking
On the front of
the drive.
If a control panel
is attached to the
drive, switch to
remote control
(otherwise a fault
will be
generated), and
then remove the
panel to be able
to see the LEDs.
No power Green Power supply on
the board OK
Green Drive in an alarm
state
Red Drive in a fault
state. To reset
the fault, press
RESET from the
control panel or
switch off the
drive power.
Red Drive in a fault state.
To reset the fault,
switch off the drive
power.
At the top left
corner of the
Assistant Control
Panel
Panel has no
power or no
drive
connection.
Green Drive in a normal
state
Green Drive in an alarm
state
Red Drive in a fault
state. To reset
the fault, press
RESET from the
control panel or
switch off the
drive power.
Red -

Technical data 307
16
Technical data
The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, eg ratings, sizes and
technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and
other marks.

308 Technical data
Ratings
Definitions
Type Input Output Frame
sizeACS310- I1N I LD I2N I2max PN
x = E/U 1)
A A A A kW hp
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A6-2 4.7 2.4 2.6 4.2 0.37 0.5 R0
03x-03A9-2 6.7 3.5 3.9 6.1 0.55 0.75 R0
03x-05A2-2 8.4 4.7 5.2 8.2 0.75 1 R1
03x-07A4-2 13.0 6.7 7.4 11.7 1.1 1.5 R1
03x-08A3-2 13.2 7.5 8.3 13.1 1.5 2 R1
03x-10A8-2 15.7 9.8 10.8 17.2 2.2 3 R2
03x-14A6-2 23.9 13.3 14.6 23.3 3 3 R2
03x-19A4-2 27.3 17.6 19.4 30.8 4 5 R2
03x-26A8-2 45 24.4 26.8 42.7 5.5 7.5 R3
03x-34A1-2 55 31.0 34.1 54.3 7.5 10 R4
03x-50A8-2 76 46.2 50.8 80.9 11.0 15 R4
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A3-4 2.4 1.2 1.3 2.1 0.37 0.5 R0
03x-02A1-4 4.0 1.9 2.1 3.3 0.55 0.75 R0
03x-02A6-4 4.5 2.4 2.6 4.2 0.75 1 R1
03x-03A6-4 6.6 3.3 3.6 5.8 1.1 1.5 R1
03x-04A5-4 7.6 4.1 4.5 7.2 1.5 2 R1
03x-06A2-4 10.6 5.6 6.2 9.8 2.2 3 R1
03x-08A0-4 12.8 7.3 8.0 12.8 3 3 R1
03x-09A7-4 15.0 8.8 9.7 15.4 4 5 R1
03x-13A8-4 20.7 12.5 13.8 21.9 5.5 7.5 R3
03x-17A2-4 24.3 15.6 17.2 27.3 7.5 10 R3
03x-25A4-4 34.0 23.1 25.4 40.4 11 15 R3
03x-34A1-4 57 31 34.1 54.3 15 20 R4
03x-41A8-4 67 38 41.8 66.5 18.5 25 R4
03x-48A4-4 74 44 48.4 77.0 22.0 30 R4
1)
E = EMC filter connected (metal EMC filter screw installed),
U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), US
parametrization
00578903.xls D
I1N continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables and fuses) at ambient
temperature of +40 °C
I LD continuous output current at max ambient temperature of +50 °C.
10% overloadability for one minute every ten minutes.
I2N maximum continuous output current at ambient temperature of +40 °C.
No overloadability, derating 1% for every additional 1 °C up to 50 °C.
I2max maximum instantaneous output current. Available for two seconds every ten
minutes at start-up, or as long as allowed by the drive temperature.

Technical data 309
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage
range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the
drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current.
Note 1: The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · PN. If the limit is
exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function
protects the input bridge of the drive against overload.
Note 2: The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).
Derating
The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds
40 °C (104 °F) or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters (3300 ft).
Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40 °C…+50 °C (+104 °F…+122 °F), the rated output
current is decreased by 1% for every additional 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current is
calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor.
Example: If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is
100% - 1 · 10 °C = 90% or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I2N.
Altitude derating
In altitudes 1000…2000 m (3300…6600 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for
every 100 m (330 ft).
Switching frequency derating
Derate according to the switching frequency used (see parameter 2606 SWITCHING
FREQ) as follows:
PN typical motor power. The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4-pole motors. The
horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4-pole motors.
R0…R4 ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other
information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the
frame size (R0…R4)
Switching
frequency
Drive voltage rating
UN = 200…240 V UN = 380…480 V
4 kHz No derating No derating
8 kHz Derate I2N to 90%. Derate I2N to 75% for R0 or to 80% for R1…R4.
12 kHz Derate I2N to 80%. Derate I2N to 50% for R0 or to 65% for R1…R4
and derate maximum ambient temperature to
30 °C (86 °F).
16 kHz Derate I2N to 75%. Derate I2N to 50% and derate maximum ambient
temperature to 30 °C (86 °F).
%
°C

310 Technical data
Power cable sizes and fuses
Cable dimensioning for rated currents (I1N) is shown in the table below together with
the corresponding fuse types for short-circuit protection of the input power cable. The
rated fuse currents given in the table are the maxima for the mentioned fuse
types. If smaller fuse ratings are used, check that the fuse rms current rating is larger
than the rated I1N current given in section Ratings on page 308. If 150% output power
is needed, multiply current I1N by 1.5. See also section Selecting the power cables on
page 36.
Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. The operating
time depends on the fuse type, the supply network impedance as well as the cross-
sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds
operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses, ultra rapid (aR) fuses will in most
cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level.
Note: Larger fuses must not be used.
Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings
ACS310- gG UL Class T
(600 V)
Supply
(U1, V1, W1)
Motor
(U2, V2, W2)
PE
x = E/U A A mm2
AWG mm2
AWG mm2
AWG
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A6-2 10 10 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-03A9-2 10 10 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-05A2-2 10 15 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-07A4-2 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-08A3-2 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-10A8-2 16 20 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-14A6-2 25 30 6.0 10 6 10 6.0 10
03x-19A4-2 25 35 6.0 10 6 10 6.0 10
03x-26A8-2 63 60 10.0 8 10 8 10.0 8
03x-34A1-2 80 80 16.0 6 16 6 16.0 6
03x-50A8-2 100 100 25.0 2 25 2 16.0 4
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A3-4 10 10 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-02A1-4 10 10 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-02A6-4 10 10 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-03A6-4 10 10 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-04A5-4 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-06A2-4 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-08A0-4 16 20 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-09A7-4 20 25 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-13A8-4 25 30 6.0 10 6 10 6.0 10
03x-17A2-4 35 35 6.0 8 6 8 6.0 8
03x-25A4-4 50 50 10.0 8 10 8 10.0 8
03x-34A1-4 80 80 16.0 6 16 6 16.0 6
03x-41A8-4 100 100 25.0 4 16 4 16.0 4
03x-48A4-4 100 100 25.0 4 25 4 16.0 4
00578903.xls D

Technical data 311
Dimensions, weights and free space requirements
Dimensions and weights
Free space requirements
Frame
size
IP20 (cabinet) / UL open
H1 H2 H3 W D Weight
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb
R0 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.1 2.4
R1 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.3 2.9
R2 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 105 4.13 165 6.50 1.5 3.3
R3 169 6.65 202 7.95 236 9.29 169 6.65 169 6.65 2.9 6.4
R4 181 7.13 202 7.95 244 9.61 260 10.24 169 6.65 4.4 9.7
00578903.xls D
Frame
size
IP20 / NEMA 1
H4 H5 W D Weight
mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb
R0 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.5 3.3
R1 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.7 3.7
R2 257 10.12 282 11.10 105 4.13 169 6.65 1.9 4.2
R3 260 10.24 299 11.77 169 6.65 177 6.97 3.5 7.7
R4 270 10.63 320 12.60 260 10.24 177 6.97 5.0 11.0
00578903.xls D
Symbols
IP20 (cabinet) / UL open
H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate
H2 height with fastenings, without clamping plate
H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate
IP20 / NEMA 1
H4 height with fastenings and connection box
H5 height with fastenings, connection box and hood
Frame
size
Free space required
Above Below On the sides
mm in mm in mm in
R0…R4 75 3 75 3 0 0
00578903.xls D

312 Technical data
Losses, cooling data and noise
Losses and cooling data
Frame size R0 has natural convection cooling. Frame sizes R1…R4 are provided
with an internal fan. The air flow direction is from bottom to top.
The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and
in the control circuit with minimum load (I/O and panel not in use) and maximum load
(all digital inputs in the on state and the panel, fieldbus and fan in use). The total heat
dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits.
Type Heat dissipation Air flow
ACS350- Main circuit Control circuit
x = E/U Rated I1N and I2N Min Max
W BTU/Hr W BTU/Hr W BTU/Hr m3
/h ft3
/min
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V
03x-02A6-2 19 65 6.1 21 22.7 78 - -
03x-03A9-2 31 106 6.1 21 22.7 78 - -
03x-05A2-2 38 130 9.5 32 26.4 90 24 14
03x-07A4-2 60 205 9.5 32 26.4 90 24 14
03x-08A3-2 62 212 9.5 32 26.4 90 21 12
03x-10A8-2 83 283 10.5 36 27.5 94 21 12
03x-14A6-2 112 383 10.5 36 27.5 94 52 31
03x-19A4-2 152 519 10.5 36 27.5 94 52 31
03x-26A8-2 250 854 16.6 57 35.4 121 71 42
03x-34A1-2 270 922 33.4 114 57.8 197 96 57
03x-50A8-2 430 1469 33.4 114 57.8 197 96 57
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A3-4 11 38 6.6 23 24.4 83 - -
03x-02A1-4 16 55 6.6 23 24.4 83 - -
03x-02A6-4 21 72 9.8 33 28.7 98 13 8
03x-03A6-4 31 106 9.8 33 28.7 98 13 8
03x-04A5-4 40 137 9.8 33 28.7 98 13 8
03x-06A2-4 61 208 9.8 33 28.7 98 19 11
03x-08A0-4 74 253 14.1 48 32.7 112 24 14
03x-09A7-4 94 321 14.1 48 32.7 112 24 14
03x-13A8-4 130 444 12.0 41 31.2 107 52 31
03x-17A2-4 173 591 12.0 41 31.2 107 52 31
03x-25A4-4 266 908 16.6 57 35.4 121 71 42
03x-34A1-4 350 1195 33.4 114 57.8 197 96 57
03x-41A8-4 440 1503 33.4 114 57.8 197 96 57
03x-48A4-4 530 1810 33.4 114 57.8 197 96 57
00578903.xls D

Technical data 313
Noise
Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables
Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables
Frame
size
Noise level
dBA
R0 <30
R1 50…62
R2 50…62
R3 50…62
R4 <62
00578903.xls D
Frame
size
Max. cable
diameter for
NEMA 1
U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2 PE
U1, V1, W1,
U2, V2, W2
Max. terminal size
flexible/rigid
Tightening
torque
Max. clamp size
solid or stranded
Tightening
torque
mm in mm2
AWG N·m lbf·in mm2
AWG N·m lbf·in
R0 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R1 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R2 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R3 29 1.14 10.0/16.0 6 1.7 15 25 3 1.2 11
R4 35 1.38 25.0/35.0 2 2.5 22 25 3 1.2 11
00578903.xls D
Conductor size Tightening
torque
Solid or stranded Stranded, with ferrule
without plastic sleeve
Stranded, with ferrule
with plastic sleeve
Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max
mm2
AWG mm2
AWG mm2
AWG N·m lbf·in
0.14/1.5 26/16 0.25/1.5 23/16 0.25/1.5 23/16 0.4 3.5

314 Technical data
Electric power network specification
Voltage (U1) 200/208/220/230/240 V AC 3-phase for 200 V AC drives
380/400/415/440/460/480 V AC 3-phase for 400 V AC drives
±10% variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default.
Short-circuit capacity Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power
connection as defined in IEC 60439-1 is 100 kA. The drive is suitable
for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms
symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage.
Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, maximum rate of change 17%/s
Imbalance Max. ±3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Motor connection data
Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Short-circuitprotection
(IEC 61800-5-1,
UL 508C)
The motor output is short-circuit proof by IEC 61800-5-1 and
UL 508C.
Frequency 0…500 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section Ratings on page 308.
Power limit 1.5 · PN
Field weakening point 10…500 Hz
Switching frequency 4, 8, 12 or 16 kHz
Maximum
recommended
motor cable length
R0: 30 m (100 ft), R1…R4: 50 m (165 ft)
With output chokes the motor cable length may be extended to 60 m
(195 ft) for R0 and 100 m (330 ft) for R1…R4.
To comply with the European EMC Directive, use the cable lengths
specified in the table below for 4 kHz switching frequency. The
lengths are given for using the drive with the internal EMC filter or an
optional external EMC filter.
4 kHz switching
frequency
Internal EMC filter Optional external
EMC filter
Second environment
(category C3 1)
)
30 m (100 ft) 30 m (100 ft)
minimum
First environment
(category C2 1)
)
- 30 m (100 ft)
1)
See the new terms in section Definitions on page 318.

Technical data 315
Control connection data
Analog inputs X1A: 2
and 5
Voltage signal, unipolar 0 (2)…10 V, Rin > 312 kohm
bipolar -10…10 V, Rin > 312 kohm
Current signal, unipolar 0 (4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
bipolar -20…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
Potentiometer reference
value (X1A: 4) 10 V ± 1%, max. 10 mA, R < 10 kohm
Resolution 0.1%
Accuracy ±1%
Analog output X1A: 7 0 (4)…20 mA, load < 500 ohm
Auxiliary voltage X1A: 9 24 V DC ± 10%, max. 200 mA
Digital inputs X1A:
12…16
(frequency input X1A:
16)
Voltage 12…24 V DC with internal or external
supply
Type PNP and NPN
Frequency input Pulse train 0…16 kHz (X1A: 16 only)
Input impedance 2.4 kohm
Relay output X1B:
17…19
Type NO + NC
Max. switching voltage 250 V AC / 30 V DC
Max. switching current 0.5 A / 30 V DC; 5 A / 230 V AC
Max. continuous current 2 A rms
Digital output X1B:
20…21
Type Transistor output PNP
Max. switching voltage 30 V DC
Max. switching current 100 mA / 30 V DC, short-circuit
protected
Frequency 10 Hz …16 kHz
Resolution 1 Hz
Accuracy 0.2%
RS-485 interface X1C:
23…26
Cable Shielded twisted pair, impedance
100…150 ohm
Termination Trunk line, drop lines allowed
Isolation Bus interface isolated from the drive
Transfer rate 1.2…76.8 kbit/s
Communication type Serial, asynchronous, half duplex
Protocol Modbus
Efficiency
Approximately 95 to 98% at nominal power level, depending on the
drive size and options
Degrees of protection
IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open: Standard enclosure. The drive
must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding
from contact.
IP20 / NEMA 1: Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a
connection box.

316 Technical data
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be
used in a heated indoor controlled environment.
Operation
installed for
stationary use
Storage
in the protective
package
Transportation
in the protective
package
Installation site altitude 0 to 2000 m (6600 ft)
above sea level
(above 1000 m
[3300 ft], see section
Derating on page
309)
- -
Air temperature -10 to +50 °C (14 to
122 °F). No frost
allowed. See section
Derating on page
309.
-40 to +70 °C (-40 to
+158 °F)
-40 to +70 °C (-40 to
+158 °F)
Relative humidity 0 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%
No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is
60% in the presence of corrosive gases.
Contamination levels
(IEC 60721-3-3,
IEC 60721-3-2,
IEC 60721-3-1)
No conductive dust allowed.
According to
IEC 60721-3-3,
chemical gases:
Class 3C2
solid particles: Class
3S2.
The drive must be
installed in clean air
according to
enclosure
classification. Cooling
air must be clean,
free from corrosive
materials and
electrically conductive
dust.
According to
IEC 60721-3-1,
chemical gases:
Class 1C2
1S2
According to
IEC 60721-3-2,
chemical gases:
Class 2C2
2S2
Sinusoidal vibration
(IEC 60721-3-3)
Tested according to
IEC 60721-3-3,
mechanical
conditions: Class 3M4
2…9 Hz, 3.0 mm
(0.12 in)
9…200 Hz, 10 m/s2
(33 ft/s2
)
- -
Shock
(IEC 60068-2-27,
ISTA 1A)
- According to ISTA 1A.
Max. 100 m/s2
(330 ft/s2
), 11 ms.
According to ISTA 1A.
Max. 100 m/s2
(330 ft/s2
), 11 ms.
Free fall Not allowed 76 cm (30 in) 76 cm (30 in)

Technical data 317
Materials
Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2 mm, PC+10%GF 2.5…3 mm and PA66+25%GF
1.5 mm, all in color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 420 C)
• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 mm, thickness of coating 20
micrometers
• extruded aluminium AlSi.
Package Corrugated cardboard.
Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve
energy and natural resources. The package materials are
environmentally compatible and recyclable. All metal parts can be
recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under
controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most
recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors
and printed circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors
contain electrolyte, which is classified as hazardous waste within the
EU. They must be removed and handled according to local
regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed
recycling instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.
Applicable standards
The drive complies with the following standards:
• IEC/EN 61800-5-1:
2003
Electrical, thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable
frequency a.c. power drives
• IEC/EN 60204-1:
2006
Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:
General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final
assembler of the machine is responsible for installing
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device.
• IEC/EN 61800-3:
2004
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC
requirements and specific test methods
• UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third edition

318 Technical data
CE marking
The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of
the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives (Directive 73/23/EEC, as amended by
93/68/EEC, and Directive 2004/108/EC).
Compliance with the European EMC Directive
The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard
(EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance
with EN 61800-3:2004 on page 318.
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.
Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly
supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment.
Note: A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing
and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects.
Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment
restricted distribution. EMC standard IEC/EN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the
distribution of the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are defined.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second
environment unrestricted distribution.
Category C2
The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and
installed as specified in the EMC filter manual.

Technical data 319
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. Motor cable length maximum 30 m (100 ft) with 4 kHz switching frequency.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
Category C3
The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC/EN 61800-
3, second environment (see page 318 for IEC/EN 61800-3 definitions).
The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:
1. The internal EMC filter is connected (the metal screw at EMC is in place) or the
optional EMC filter is installed.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. With the internal EMC filter: motor cable length 30 m (100 ft) with 4 kHz switching
frequency.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public
network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected
if the drive is used on such a network.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT
(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a
corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive.
UL marking
See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive.
The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements.
UL checklist
Input power connection – See section Electric power network specification on page
314.
Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) – See Selecting the supply
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) on page 35.
Ambient conditions – The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled
environment. See section Ambient conditions on page 316 for specific limits.

320 Technical data
Input cable fuses – For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection
must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any
applicable local codes. To fulfil this requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in
section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 310.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. To fulfil this
requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and
fuses on page 310.
Power cable selection – See section Selecting the power cables on page 36.
Power cable connections – For the connection diagram and tightening torques, see
section Connecting the power cables on page 47.
Overload protection – The drive provides overload protection in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (US).
C-Tick marking
See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive.
C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-Tick mark is attached
to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3:2004 –
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic
Compatibility Scheme.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced
by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum
Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development
(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency
spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/electronic
products.
For fulfilling the requirements of the standard, see section Compliance with
EN 61800-3:2004 on page 318.
RoHS marking
The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that drive follows the provisions of
the European RoHS Directive. RoHS = the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

Technical data 321
Liability limits
The manufacturer is not responsible for:
• Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation, commissioning, repair,
alteration, or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements
specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant
documentation.
• Units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident.
• Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for
special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses or penalties.
Patent protection in the USA
This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents:
4,920,306 5,301,085 5,463,302 5,521,483 5,532,568 5,589,754 5,612,604
5,654,624 5,799,805 5,940,286 5,942,874 5,952,613 6,094,364 6,147,887
6,175,256 6,184,740 6,195,274 6,229,356 6,252,436 6,265,724 6,305,464
6,313,599 6,316,896 6,335,607 6,370,049 6,396,236 6,448,735 6,498,452
6,552,510 6,597,148 6,600,290 6,741,059 6,774,758 6,844,794 6,856,502
6,859,374 6,922,883 6,940,253 6,934,169 6,956,352 6,958,923 6,967,453
6,972,976 6,977,449 6,984,958 6,985,371 6,992,908 6,999,329 7,023,160
7,034,510 7,036,223 7,045,987 7,057,908 7,059,390 7,067,997 7,082,374
7,084,604 7,098,623 7,102,325 7,109,780 7,164,562 7,176,779 7,190,599
7,215,099 7,221,152 7,227,325 7,245,197 7,250,739 7,262,577 7,271,505
7,274,573 7,279,802 7,280,938 7,330,095 7,349,814 7,352,220 7,365,622
7,372,696 7,388,765 D503,931 D510,319 D510,320 D511,137 D511,150
D512,026 D512,696 D521,466 D541,743S D541,744S D541,745S D548,182S
D548,183S
Other patents pending.

322 Technical data

Dimensions 323
17
Dimensions
Dimension drawings of the ACS310 are shown below. The dimensions are given in
millimeters and [inches].

324 Dimensions
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open
R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1.
3AUA0000050967-AFramesizesR0andR1,IP20(cabinetinstallation)/ULopen

Dimensions 325
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1
R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1.
FramesizesR0andR1,IP20/NEMA13AUA0000051086-A

326 Dimensions
Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open
FramesizeR2,IP20(cabinetinstallation)/ULopen3AUA0000051090-A

Dimensions 327
Frame size R2, NEMA 1
FramesizeR2,IP20/NEMA13AUA0000051097-A

328 Dimensions

Dimensions 329

330 Dimensions

Dimensions 331

Abb acs310-users-guide

More Related Content

What's hot (6)

Viewers also liked (19)

Similar to Abb acs310-users-guide (20)

More from Toàn Huỳnh (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Abb acs310-users-guide